JP6623359B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a torso gaming machine (slot machine).

  In gaming tables such as pachinko machines, the game area of the game board is provided with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall, prize holes where game balls can be won, start ports, variable prize holes, etc. General. When a game ball wins, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In addition, there has been known such a game console having sound output means.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the sound output means.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game console having a characteristic sound output unit.

A game console of the present invention that solves the above object,
Sound output means,
Image display means;
Directing means,
An attacker that can change between an open state and a closed state,
A pass area through which a game ball entering the attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
Until the validity period started after the attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the passage area is valid,
When the Nth game ball passes through the passing area after the attacker has been opened, the attacker is closed,
After the attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, if the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area before the expiration of the validity period, an over-winning sound is output by the sound output means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as “total number display”) that changes according to the total number of game balls that have passed through the passing area during execution of the big hit game,
The total number display is a display that changes even when the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area,
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “probable change notification effect”) for notifying that the game state after the end of the big hit game is in the certainty state,
During a period in which the probability variation notification effect by the representation section is being performed, the total number displayed Ri Do hidden,
When the power is cut off during the period in which the attacker is in the open state and the power is restored thereafter (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the total number display is different before and after the power is restored. Is displayed,
In the first case, when the sum of the number of game balls passing through the passage area before power interruption and the number of game balls passing through the passage area after power restoration is N + 1, the sound output means The over-winning sound is output by
It is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic sound output unit.

It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning a 1st embodiment from the front side (the player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol (D) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. (A) is a flowchart of a process at power-on of the main control unit, (b) is a flowchart of a return start process, and (c) is a flowchart of an initial start process. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of the special figure-related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the special figure-based lottery processing. It is a flowchart of a process during a symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special figure display fixed weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start wait processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power opening processing. It is a flowchart of a special electric combination operation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric-power combination control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special power combination operation pattern data table, and (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special power combination operation data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric combination remaining ball detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric-power combination operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the success / failure judgment table. It is a figure explaining the contents of a special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part image control processing. (A) is a flowchart of an effect control process executed in the first sub control unit main process, (b) is a flowchart of an over-winning winning sound output control process, and (c) is a flowchart of a winning number display control process. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decoration design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 26 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 25. FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of an effect in another case following FIG. 26 (q). It is a timing chart explaining the operation from the start to the end of the big hit game. It is a timing chart explaining the operation timing of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) in the big hit game. It is the figure which showed the situation of the big hit game in 15R probability change big hit in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the big hit game in 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 30 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the big hit game in 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 31 step by step. It is a figure explaining other display modes in a big hit game in a 15R special big hit, and is a figure showing step-by-step how to display the number of winnings per round. It is a figure explaining other display modes in a big hit game in a 15R special big hit, and it was a figure which showed a mode that display according to the total number of game balls which won a variable winning opening from the start of a big hit game was carried out step by step. It is. It is a figure explaining another display mode in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit, and is a figure showing step by step how to display the number of winnings per round for each variable winning opening. It is a figure explaining another embodiment in the big hit game in 15R special big hit, and is a figure showing in a step by step about a situation when a first variable winning opening is won over a round. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the big hit game in 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 36 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the big hit game in 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 37 step by step. It is a figure explaining other display modes in a big hit game, and is a figure showing in a step-like manner the effect display performed every time a game ball wins a variable winning opening. (K ′) is a diagram illustrating another display mode following FIG. 39 (h), and (l ′) is a diagram illustrating another display mode following FIG. 39 (h). It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement from the start to the end of a big hit game in 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB). It is the figure which showed the situation of the big hit game in 15R big hits (substantially 8R-RUB) step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the big hit game in 15R big hits (substantially 8R-RUB) shown in FIG. 42 in steps. It is a figure showing the front of the attacker unit applied to the pachinko machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 45 is a view of the attacker unit shown in FIG. 44 as viewed from the back. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of a 2nd variable winning opening, (a) is a figure showing that a V shutter is in a closed state, and (b) is a figure in which a V shutter is in an open state. FIG. It is a timing chart explaining operation timing of the 1st variable winning opening and the 2nd variable winning opening in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in a pachinko machine concerning a 2nd embodiment step by step. It is the figure which showed the situation of the big hit game in 15R special big hit in steps. It is a figure explaining an example of an over winning effect. It is a figure which shows a mode in the case of a power failure return in a big hit game in steps. It is the figure which showed step by step about the modification of the big hit game in 15R special big hit shown in FIG. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed step by step about another operation example in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 52, and (d)-(e) shows a modification of the successful effect. It is a figure, and (f)-(j) is a figure showing an example of the concrete production in a big hit game. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed step by step about another operation example in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 52, and (d)-(g) are other effects of V notification. It is a figure showing an example. It is a figure showing the example of other concrete production in the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows another example of the big hit game start effect shown in FIG. 55 (a), (b)-(f) is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the big hit game , (G) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect of the big hit game end effect, (h) ~ (i) is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect of the big hit game end effect, (j) (L) is a diagram showing a modification of the over-winning prize effect. It is a figure showing an example of the specific production in the big hit game. It is a figure showing an example of the specific production in the big hit game. It is a figure explaining other examples of production of an over winning effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 which shows the other example of the game board 200 shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the specific production in the big hit game. FIG. 61 (i) is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the effect example illustrated in FIG. 61, and FIGS. 61 (a) to (f) are diagrams illustrating a modified example of the display of the number of acquired prize balls. It is a figure showing the example of the specific production of the winning prize production in the big hit game.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk of a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is formed in a frame shape so that the inside thereof can be opened. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is also provided with a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Note that a door sensor with a ball storage tray that detects that the door with a ball storage tray 108 has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball release button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by an operation, and a game ball guided to the firing device 110 by a player's operation. The ball firing handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 are built in the effect button 136. A button button 138 for emitting a button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and an instruction for returning a player's balance to the card unit. And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full-state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104 and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 moves the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It fires toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. Note that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed down while the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided to guide a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when connected to a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game balls flowing into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Accordingly, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing. Either the high or low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player with this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 that stores a main board 156 that forms a main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board case 162 accommodating a first sub-board 160 that forms a first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by operation of a game clerk, and launching of a game ball. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs a control process, and a power control section 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric game machines, A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on; Also, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 on which a game ball can roll is defined. At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The effect device 206 performs an effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 according to the present embodiment is a so-called right-handed game board. In the right-hitting machine, by changing the launching strength of the game ball by operating the ball firing handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is changed to a right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and a left route on the left side of the rendering device 206. You can beat each other. In the present embodiment, the ease of entering a ball into a general figure starting port 228, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, a first variable winning port 234, a second variable winning port 235, etc. The difference is between a game ball falling on the right route and a game ball falling on the left route.

  The general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235 are respectively referred to as the general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the first variable winning. Since the opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right route, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right route, and the entering of a game ball falling on the left route is relatively easy. Difficult or impossible. On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 1 starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left side path, and the right side path, due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238 and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but other than a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative design and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of an effect unit that can execute a plurality of types of effects. The decorative symbol display device 208 also functions as an example of a display unit that can execute a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Below the game area 124, a first special symbol display device (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "first special symbol display device") 212 and a second special symbol display device (hereinafter, "second special symbol display device"). 214), a normal symbol display device (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “general symbol display device”) 210, and a first special symbol holding lamp (hereinafter, “special symbol 1 holding lamp”). 218), a second special symbol holding lamp (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "special symbol 2 holding lamp") 220, and a normal symbol holding lamp (hereinafter, referred to as "common figure holding lamp"). ) 216 and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "common symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol 2".

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image. In the present embodiment, the general-purpose display device 210 includes a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special map, and in this embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are examples of symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced effect. The display device 208 may also be an example of a symbol display unit.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the general figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held. (For example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure) can be reserved. The term “suspending” here means suspending the start of various determination processes (lottery process and the like) based on the start information described later. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state, and changes the game state from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. It turns on when the state is changed to the probability state, and turns off when the state is changed from the high state to the low state.

  Further, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general figure starting port 228, a special figure 1 starting port 230, a special figure 2 starting port 232, a first variable A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (wins the general winning opening 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game ball includes a ball to be paid out to the player as a value for winning (hereinafter, may be referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “ball rental”). Is included).

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The special figure 1 starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to set a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball to the upper plate 126. At the same time, and a special figure variable game (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The special figure 1 starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided below the ordinary figure starting port 228. That is, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a tongue member 2321 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid, and the combination of the tongue member 2321 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 corresponds to a variable starting means. Also called an electric tulip. The tongue member 2321 is a member for changing the difficulty of winning the special figure 2 starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 while the tongue member 2321 is closed, and the state in which the tongue member 2321 is closed is an opening and closing state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, in the case where the player has won the general figure fluctuation game and the general figure display device 210 has hit and stopped and displayed the symbol, the tongue member 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the ball moves to the special figure 2 starting port 232. It becomes possible to enter the ball. That is, a state in which the tongue member 2321 is closed (first state) is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and an open state in which the tongue member 2321 is open (second state) is a state in which the game ball easily enters. In other words, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are arranged vertically above and below the right side of the gaming board 200. Both the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are provided with a variable winning opening and a door member capable of opening and closing the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening may be called an attacker. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is a first attacker having a first variable winning opening and a first door member 2341, and the second variable winning opening 235 is a second variable winning opening and a second door member 2351. And a second attacker comprising: Hereinafter, in the case where the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are described without particular distinction, the variable winning opening (234, 235), the variable winning opening, the door member (2341), etc. , 2351) or an attacker. The door members (2341, 235) are in a closed state (sometimes referred to as a difficult ball entry state, a difficulty winning state, and a impossible winning state), and it is easier for the game ball to enter the variable winning opening than in the closed state. The state is changed from any one of the open states (sometimes referred to as an easy ball entry state, an easy winning state, and a possible winning state) to any other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning opening (234, 235) of the present embodiment is when the door members (2341, 235) are closed. It is a stationary state that coincides with the surface of the game board 200 on the player side. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and in the open state of the variable winning openings (234, 235) of the present embodiment, the door members (2341, 235) are substantially perpendicular to the gaming board 200. Up to the player side. The variable winning opening (234, 235) is kept closed until a jackpot game described later is started. For example, in an odd round of the jackpot game (for example, one round, three rounds,. The winning opening 234 is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in even rounds (for example, 2 rounds, 4 rounds ...). In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are not simultaneously opened. In addition, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is practically impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. In addition, the open state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed so that a game ball can enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely opened. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as the game ball can be won by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the big hit symbol after winning the special figure change game, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. The ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 by a predetermined discharge path, and then discharged to the game island side. When the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area (first passage area) in the discharge passage (first discharge passage), it is detected by the first count switch SW1. When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first count switch SW1 within the effective period described later, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of the balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. You. Further, the ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 by a predetermined discharge path, and then discharged to the game island side. When the game ball passes through a predetermined passage area (second passage area) in this discharge passage (second discharge passage), it is detected by the second count switch SW2. When the passing of the game ball is detected by the second count switch SW2 within the effective period described later, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of the balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. You. As described above, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are variable winnings that can be changed to an easy-to-enter state in which game balls are easily entered and to a difficult-to-enter state in which game balls are difficult to enter. It functions as an example of the means. The first passage area and the second passage area function as an example of a passage area through which a game ball entering the variable winning means can pass. In addition, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may be in the form of an electric tulip (electric chewing).

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and sets the firing rod 146 and the launching hammer 148 are used to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strike the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and has a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) or The start port (special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232) does not win, or does not win any prize port or start port, or only passes through the general figure start port 228, and the out port 240 To reach.

  Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is provided. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 includes a warp entrance 242a arranged at the center on the left side of the effect device 206, and a warp exit 242b for discharging a game ball entering the warp entrance 242a to a front stage 244 below a front surface of the effect device 206. . The front stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on a nail of the game board 200, or the like. A special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball 230 is provided.

  The effect movable body 224 of the present embodiment has a slightly elliptical panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 224 can be moved up and down in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 4) including a lattice-shaped left door and a right door is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. When the left door and the right door are closed, the shielding devices 246 have their inner ends overlapping, and shield the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. When the left door and the right door are opened, the respective inner edges slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, the left door and the right door can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern is shielded to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is the displayed decorative pattern. You can do it. In addition, the left door and the right door may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the shoji part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body, and decorate the rear part. The display by the symbol display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear may be completely invisible. . The shielding device 246 may be configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door and the right door are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that performs launch control of game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main controller 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main controller 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit incorporates two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor (first count switch SW1) that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port. And the second count switch SW2), the front frame door open sensor, the inner frame open sensor, and the various sensors 320 including the lower plate full sensor are received, and the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage are received. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the random number generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212, 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for controlling the display of the general-purpose holding lamp 216, the special-purpose holding lamp 218, the special-purpose holding lamp 220, and the high-accuracy middle lamp 222; A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the tongue members 2321 of the H.232 and the door members 2341 and 342 of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. And store it in the register. Similarly, when receiving a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generating circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal plate 349. The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the game machine.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  The main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although the signal is configured to be transmitted, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit signals such as commands from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entirety of the first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. Yes. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246; a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246; a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136; A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the operation, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. Reads image data and the like stored in ROM 406 based on a signal from sensor circuit 428 and CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-controller 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-controller 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game frame lamp drive for controlling the game frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental game. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open, and outputs an open signal. Upon outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of a firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148 and control of a ball feeder 634 for supplying a ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal indicating a firing intensity corresponding to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is configured to supply power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, a power storage circuit (for example, , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500 and the discharge unit Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 fluctuating game is started on condition that the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment (variable display of special figure 1) (special figure (Fluctuating game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the “variable display of special figure 2” that repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of the central segment. (Figure change game). When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special figure variable display. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 5A shows nine types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure I”. In FIG. 5A, a blank portion in the figure indicates a location of a segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a location of a segment to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("special figure A" to "special figure G") are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) big hit symbol, and is a 15R certain variable big hit pattern which can expect to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit pattern. Therefore, while it is possible to expect winning in five of the fifteen rounds, the remaining round is a real 5R probability variable big hit symbol in which no winning is expected, and the “special figure C” is a 15R big hit symbol. There is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to be obtained in all rounds of the 15 rounds, and the “special figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds while it is expected to obtain a ball in one round. It is a real 4R-RUB in which it is possible to expect to obtain a ball in four rounds of the und while no ball is expected to be obtained in the remaining rounds. FIG. G "is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability change or a hidden probability change in which it is not possible to expect a payout in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a winning is expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit is specified. (The 9th round or the 9th round), it is a jackpot in which the player is inspired to determine whether or not the round in which the expected winnings can be obtained continues.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of a software random number. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure change game is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. Also, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “typical probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general figure, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and is in the ordinary high probability state. In the high probability state of the general figure, it is easier to win the fluctuation game of the general figure than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-purpose fluctuating game is 1/100 in the general-purpose low probability state (non-electric support state), and increases to 99/100 in the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal figure change). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time of one opening of the tongue member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extending the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, in the electric support state, the tongue member 2321 is more likely to open (increase in the number of open electric chews) than in the non-electric support state. For example, the tongue member 2321 which is opened only once in the non-electric support state per prize at the ordinary figure starting port 228 is opened twice in the electric support state (opened for 2 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds) Open). By extending the power chew opening period or increasing the number of times the power chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is disadvantageous for the player, especially when the gaming ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of prize balls in the jackpot game and the winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning openings (attackers) 234 and 235 is reduced. This is because there are cases. Note that, in the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the figure change, the figure change, the power open period extension, and the power open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, game balls are less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is changed into a prize difficult state where the game ball is difficult to enter and an easy prize state where the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state (the normal figure high probability state) is continued until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and “Tokuzu F” is stopped and displayed, and after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, the power support state is maintained while the special figure change game is performed 100 times. It shifts to the support state (normal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support ("Tokuzu G") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is over.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is over. When the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game ends.

  In this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hitting game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 second at a maximum for each operation. In addition, in the opening of the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) at the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (the predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If so, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing count and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed and shifted. Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. 5B shows six types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure f”, of which five special figures are big hit symbols (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get balls in all rounds of the round, and the “special figure c” is a 15R jackpot design, and is expected to get balls in eight out of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds, and the “Tokuzu d” is a 15R jackpot design, and it is expected to obtain a ball in four of the 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB for which it is not expected to obtain a payout, and the “special figure e” is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. “Special figure f” is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner, separately from the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of the decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the real 5R probability variable jackpot (“special figure B”), the 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and the 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns having the same number other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1-decoration 1”) Decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4 ”). When notifying the 15R sure-change jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. −decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. A combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 1-decoration-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration-decoration 4”) that is a decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the hidden probability change ("special figure G") or the small hit ("special figure H"), which is a 2R big hit, is notified, "decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure f”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be referred to as the decorative symbol variable display. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 5 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the general symbol according to the present embodiment, namely, a general symbol "common symbol A" and a non-standard symbol "common symbol B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 displays all seven segments and turns on one central segment. Performing the "floating display of the ordinary figure" (the ordinary figure fluctuating game) which repeats the lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols "Picture B", which is a symbol deviated from the "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5D as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of the ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as the “floating display of the ordinary figure”.

  Next, a main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on processing, FIG. 6B is a flowchart of the return activation processing, and FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the initial activation processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether the voltage is 9 V or more. When the voltage value of the power supply is less than the predetermined value (Step S102: No), the wait is performed until the voltage value of the power supply becomes more than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value becomes more than the predetermined value (Step S102: Yes), Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In the initial setting of the internal registers, the WDT 314 is activated, the access to the RAM 308 is permitted, and a numerical value that determines the execution cycle of a main control unit timer interrupt process described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312. After performing processing such as initial setting of serial communication between the controller and the payout controller 600 and setting of a maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the clerk of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that an operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process proceeds to step S108 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial startup process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the information of the power status is not the information indicating the suspension (Step S105: No), the process proceeds to Step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and executes an initial startup process described later. On the other hand, if the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register of 1-byte configuration whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check sum is calculated. It is determined whether the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption, and returns. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial startup process described later is executed.

  Here, the return activation processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initialization at the time of return activation is performed. More specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return-to-start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (error flag due to magnetic detection or a winning error) are performed. A process for clearing, a process for clearing the previous device error status, a process for clearing the device error status for a security signal, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area in which the initial setting was performed in step S201 is set as the address for starting the RAM clear, and then the return activation process ends.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and after resetting each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and the register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power restoration command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state at the time of power failure, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, the initial startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial startup processing is started, in step S301, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed. Specifically, the initial setting of the soft random numbers used in the lottery of the special map and the general map is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the address after the storage area in which the initial setting was performed in step S301 is set as the address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial startup processing ends.

  In addition, in the initial startup processing, for example, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial startup processing of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power restoration command in the command setting transmission processing (step S405) in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, after the return start process or the initial start process is performed, in step SS109, a RAM clear process is performed. In the RAM clear processing, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control-related startup setting is performed. In the sub-control-related activation setting, the activation wait counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted three times from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, processing for setting the initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error state signal, prize ball signal, general drawing hit signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, general drawing operation Medium signal, easy winning state signal, special figure hit signal, special figure small hit signal (however, limited to models with small hits), special figure changing signal, special figure changing time shortening state signal, special electric character (variable winning) Mouth 234, 235, Attacker) Working signal, Condition device working signal, Accessory continuous working device working signal, Big winning opening solenoid signal, Ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, Design LED data, External terminal board signal, etc. Setting of the output port to be performed. After the process of step S111 is completed, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy winning state may indicate an electric support state.

  Next, a main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  After ending the execution of the above-described main control power-on process, the main control unit 300 starts executing the main control unit main loop process. In step S401 of the main control unit main loop process, the main control unit 300 disables the interrupt. After the setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. Updating of the random number counter for initial value generation is performed, for example, assuming that a numerical range that can be taken as a basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interruption permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed. In this subcommand transmission processing, it is checked whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, processing for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure fluctuation time determination random number and the general figure fluctuation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V). : Yes), returning to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and if less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), proceed to step S408. In step S408, power interruption processing is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interruption to be prohibited, the power supply status information is set to “suspend”. Also, a checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. After that, the setting to prohibit the access to the RAM 308 is performed, and then the HALT state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a description will be given of a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt processing, processing for temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In steps S502 and S503, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S403 is updated, and then the random number counter for special figure determination used in the main control unit 300. The random number counter for determining the special figure fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the general figure fluctuation period are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as a certain random value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random value, and 1 is added to the obtained value before the original value is obtained. In the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to (e.g., 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round next time. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is being restricted (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated) If it is (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519. If the interrupt function is not limited (if the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, that the interruption function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of two-way communication, a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If a specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a timer update process is performed. In this timer updating process, a general symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the general symbol display device 210, and measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the first special figure display device 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for performing, a special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbols on the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port state update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the general figure starting port 228, and the out port 240 are input via the input port of the I / O 310. , A first variable winning port (first attacker) 234, a second variable winning port (second attacker) 235, a winning port (general winning port 226), and the like, to monitor the presence or absence of a signal input thereto. It is stored in the signal state storage area.

  To explain the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area before and after the second detection provided separately for each ball detection sensor. The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above) is read out from the present detection signal storage area partitioned and provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out in the above-described previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Also, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. If it is determined that the winning in the starting opening or winning opening is abnormal, the winning is invalidated and the information stored in the signal state storage area is deleted.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning opening prize processing, the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor. For this reason, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if the detection continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the input of the detection signal, it is determined that there is a prize. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it may be determined that there is a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In step S507, the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the match is made with the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232, or the general figure starting port 228 Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 226, 234 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228.

  For example, when information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning opening 226. Is determined, and a process associated with winning in the subsequent general winning opening 226 is performed. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the number-of-prize-balls storage area provided for each winning opening or for each start-up port is read, and 1 is added to set the original number-of-prize-balls storage area.

  In the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning reception process is also performed. In this prize receiving process, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. The determination is made using the result of determination as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information. If the first special figure starting port 230 has a prize and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is stored in the special figure 1 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value is obtained as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  If the second special figure starting port 232 has a winning and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value of the special counter 2 storing the winning counter value in the counter circuit 318 is selected. At the same time as acquiring the random number value, the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value as the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a general figure winning random number value from a random number counter for generating a general figure winning random number value. It is stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning in the first variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning variable storage area for the first variable winning opening. The same applies to the second variable winning opening 235. When the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (the determination of the success / failure of the special figure, the pattern, and the lottery of the variable time) is also performed.

  In step S509, a winning-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process of setting an abnormality in accordance with a result of the process is performed. Note that some switches may not detect abnormality. In step S510, an out-switch input update process is performed. In the out-switch input updating process, a process of detecting the number of game balls that have passed through a sensor provided in the out port 240 and updating the number is performed. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S511, a serial command management process is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted by the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600) transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub-control unit 400 after the power is turned on. And a command for notifying a method of activating the main control unit 300 (initial activation, return activation), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for a designated prize ball.

  The commands received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 include a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received the command from the main control unit 300) and a test shooting test signal. Command (prize ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation state command (operating / non-operating prize ball payout). Command to the first sub-control unit 400 to indicate that a payout is being made (lighting / non-lighting of an LED or the like).

  Next, in step S512, the special figure state updating process for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update processing executes one of the following eight processings according to the processing state of the special figure. The special figure state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a normal state updating process is performed. This ordinary figure state update processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state updating process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off and on of the 7-segment LED included in the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that a normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of a winning symbol and a missing symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  In addition, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the tongue member 2321 to the open state. And the information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general-purpose state updating process that starts at a timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the towel member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the tongue member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening and closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to the non-operating state. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is off, the normal figure off flag is turned on as described later. When the out-of-usual-figure flag is on, even in the ordinary-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made to set the non-operating state of the ordinary drawing. In the ordinary figure state updating process in the case where the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

  In addition, in the step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general drawing related lottery processing, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure changing game is a winning or a non-winning by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A win determination is made, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the general-purpose timer random number value described above is acquired as the general-purpose timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are determined based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. From among the above, one time for displaying the fuji figure on the fuji graphic display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in the fuji fluctuating time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the fuji graphic fluctuating display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-purpose floating games is stored in the general-purpose reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored. When a predetermined error is detected, the first sub control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning ports 234 and 235, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special Display data to be output to the symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, an external output signal management process is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations are made to transmit various commands to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set). Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, big hit start command, big hit round number designation command, power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type), and information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end production start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of a prize in the second special figure starting port 232, and presence / absence of a variable prize port 234, 235. Includes prizes. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a big winning opening winning command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. Information indicating the number of the timer, the number of the first special figure variable game or the number of the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like stored in the command data in the RAM 308 are set. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308 includes the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. A value, information indicating the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set.

  In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, command control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and special figure probability fluctuation are stored in the command data. Information indicating the value of the flag, the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game are stored. Set information such as the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game are stored. Set information such as the number. In addition, in this step S516, a general command special figure reservation increasing process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the command information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S517, a display device display setting process is performed. In this display device display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as the “number of reserved balls, symbol combination”, the state (during electric support or non-electric support), the right-handed state, etc. of the ordinary and special figures Processing such as setting data to be output is performed. In step S518, an output management process is performed. In the output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or an LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub-control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait processing, in order to wait for the first sub-controller 400 to be activated and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by one and the activation wait counter becomes zero. If it has, a preparation for transmitting a predetermined command is made. Note that the predetermined command may be any one or more of a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been released, a state in which a lower plate full error has occurred, A command indicating that there is an error, an error indicating that a shortage of payout balls error has occurred, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnection error And a launch position command (a command for notifying the launch position according to the state).

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S501 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main loop processing. .

  Next, the special figure state update processing (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S601, the special figure processing state address is obtained and stored, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, a special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 10A, a symbol change processing shown in FIG. 11, and a special figure shown in FIG. Display determination weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 13 (a), special power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 14, special power combination remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 17, special power combination operation end processing shown in FIG. 18, and FIG. One of the indicated hit end display weight processing is executed.

  In step S603, the winning easy status is set to ON. In step S604, a state change in the special figure processing state is determined. In the next step S605, the presence or absence of a state change in the special figure processing state (a change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update processing ends, and there is a state change in the special figure processing state. If the value has changed (the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "change waiting state". If the state is applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not, the process is not performed (step S606). : No), and it proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to "hit start display wait state". If the state is applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608; Step S607: No), the special figure state update processing ends.

  In step S608, a transmission request for a subcommand is set (in this embodiment, after a transmission request for a game state command including a special figure and a general figure game state is set, the firing position including information on whether the player is in a right-handed state is set. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update processing ends. The order of transmission requests for subcommands is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or transmission requests for a plurality of commands may be collectively performed in one process.

  Subsequently, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery processing executed in the special figure state update processing.

  The special figure-related lottery processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “change waiting state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S701 of the special figure-related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S702, it is determined whether the acquired number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 or not. In the case of (when there is no suspension of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is a reservation of the special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 in order to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S703, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether the acquired number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 0 or not. If there is no suspension of the variable game (step S704: Yes), the special figure-related lottery process is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a reservation of the special figure 1 variable game) (step S704: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to Tokuzu 1.

  In step S705, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one when executing the processing relating to the special figure 2, and the processing is executed by the RAM 308 when executing the processing relating to the special figure 1. The stored value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer processing, when executing the processing relating to special figure 2, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the special figures 2 to 4 are stored. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 2 and executing the processing related to the special figure 1, The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 of the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) in the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority varying machine. In addition, each of the special figure 2 and the special figure 1 can store up to four reservations.

  In step S707, a special drawing per lottery process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this special figure per lottery process, a decision as to whether or not a special figure 2 variable game (or a special figure 1 variable game) is made is performed. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery processing, the second special figure is determined based on the result of the special figure lottery processing and the random number value in step S707 with reference to the special figure 2 symbol determination table (or the special figure 1 symbol determination table). A lottery of special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 21B is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. In the case of determining the display symbol data of the special figure 1 in the display symbol lottery processing of step S708, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected based on the result of the pass / fail of FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected. When the result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and if the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

  When the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery processing of step S708, the special figure 2 lottery processing of step S707 is referred to by referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. The display symbol data of the special figure 2 is selected by lottery based on the result of the success / failure of the special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be displayed are determined, the symbol data to be displayed on the special figure display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display setting process (step S517) in the main controller timer interrupt process, and the display is displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined, and if the symbol is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a symbol with a big hit or a small hit, a process of setting data to be set to a hit end (data setting process after a hit end) is performed. The post-hit data setting process is a process of setting a gaming state set after the hit according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 10A, in step S709, a special figure variable time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variable time lottery process, a non-illustrated variable time table is referred to, and based on the result of the success / failure of the special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the special figure lottery process in step S707 and the numerical value range of the random number value. Then, after selecting the special figure fluctuation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery process per special map>
Next, the lottery process per special figure (step S707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the special figure-based lottery processing (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery processing.

  In step S801 of the special figure lottery process, the special figure lottery is performed with reference to the hit / failure determination table. In the present embodiment, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both performed the lottery per special figure using the same determination table. However, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 have different win / fail determination tables. You may prepare it.

  FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination high probability table, and FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination low probability table. In the special figure lottery process in step S801, when performing the special / non-permission determination of the special figure 1, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it refers to the high / low determination probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 20, the low probability table for judging the success or failure shown in FIG. 20B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated in the referred hit / fail judgment table and the acquired random value, the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination.

  Similarly, in the special figure lottery process in step S801, when the special figure 2 is determined to be a win or a failure, if the special figure is in a high probability state, the high / low determination table shown in FIG. However, if the state is the special figure low probability state, the low probability table for judging the success or failure shown in FIG. 20B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range shown in the referred judgment table, and the obtained random number, the judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 fluctuating game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination.

  Returning to FIG. 10B, in step S802, it is determined whether the result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure in step S801 is other than "big hit", and if it is not "big hit" (step S802). : Yes), proceed to step S803, and in the case of "big hit" (step S802: No), proceed to step S804. In step S803, the special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hit lottery process of step S803, the special figure small hit determination table shown in FIG. 20C is referenced, and the special figure small hit determination table is determined based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit determination table and the acquired random number. The result of the success / failure determination of the small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery hit / fail determination (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the hit / failure determination result, and a loss is made with a probability of 63536/65536. If the result of lottery winning / non-performing judgment (lottery result) per special figure is special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 10B, in step S804, the RAM 308 is determined on the basis of the determination result (lottery result) of the special figure lottery winning selection in step S801 and the special figure small hitting lottery determination result (lottery result) of step S803. , One of “big hits”, “small hits”, and “losing” is set as the hit determination type stored in “1”. In the next step S805, information indicating “during special figure change” is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the symbol change processing shown in FIG. 11 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared, and in the next step S807, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure change start command) is set. In the next step S808, the special figure After setting the basic signal information (for test) indicating that 2 (or Toku-zu 1) is changing, the lottery process per Toku-zu is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a symbol change process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the symbol change processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This symbol change process is a process called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “during special figure change” in step 602 of the special figure state update processing.

  In step S901 of the symbol change processing, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the RAM to be updated is calculated according to the special figure operation type. .

  In step S902, the timer of the special figure fluctuation time set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery processing is acquired by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901. Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, if the timer of the special figure variation time is 0 (if the set special figure variation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and if not, the set special figure variation time is not set. If has not elapsed (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special figure display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol change process is ended, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), And proceed to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol change processing ends.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of the special figure 2, the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment are repeated using the second special symbol display device 214. "Variation display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. I do. Thus, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special figure display confirmation weight processing shown in FIG. 12 is called and executed.

  In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step is performed. In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request of a subcommand (special figure fluctuation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 5 (b), and after setting a special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for which the special figure is stopped to be displayed based on the symbol type information, The in-flight processing ends.

  Next, the special figure display confirmation weight processing executed in the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special figure display confirmation weight processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special figure display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol change processing is greater than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation wait processing is terminated. If not (if the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 is performed. Proceed to.

  In step S1002, the symbol determination count information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation process is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special figure variation time shortening status when the symbol is stopped (the special figure variation game) (In the present embodiment, the status indicating any of the normal game state, the probable change game state, and the time saving game state) is stored in the RAM 308 as a save special figure variation time reduction status described later.

  In step S1004, the win / fail determination type set in step S804 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1005, it is determined whether the acquired win / fail determination type is "big hit". As a result of this determination, when the hit / fail judgment type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and when the hit / fail judgment type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Then, the number of time savings of the special map stored in the RAM 308 is updated (the number of time savings is reduced by one).

  In step S1007, the win / fail determination type set in step S804 of the special figure-related lottery process is acquired, and in the next step S1008, it is determined whether the acquired win / fail determination type is "small hit". As a result of this determination, if the hit / fail judgment type is “small hit” (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the hit / fail judgment type is other than “small hit” (step S1008: No), the process proceeds to step S1010. Proceeding to S1009, the information indicating the "change waiting state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 10A is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for a test) indicating the special figure hit / fail type or the symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, the specified range of RAM is cleared. Here, the winning / failing type, the number of activations of the special winning combination, the number of winnings of the large winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235), the operation pattern of the special winning combination, the operating state of the special winning combination, the total number of winnings, In addition to clearing a flag relating to winning abnormalities in the special winning opening and the type of a win end display timer, at the time of a big hit, the winning easy status and the special figure general status are further cleared.

  In step S1012, information indicating "hit start display wait state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in step S602 of the next special figure state update processing, the hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 13A is called and executed. In step S1013, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request of a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

  In step S1015, the symbol type information is set. In step S1016, a hit start display timer corresponding to the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set. In step S1017, the symbol type information set in step S1015 is set. After setting the other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait processing ends.

  Next, the hit start wait processing executed in the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The hit start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “hit start display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. .

  In step S1101 of the hit start wait processing, it is determined whether or not the hit start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display final wait processing is larger than 0. If it has not been performed (step S1101: Yes), the hit start weight processing is ended. If not (if the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, after executing the special power combination opening process described later, the hit start wait process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, the special electric power combination opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the special power role opening process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

  In step S1201 of the special power combination opening process, information indicating a "special power combination operation state" is set in the special figure processing state. Accordingly, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 14 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operating state of the special power combination are cleared. In the next step S1203, the subcommand (special power Set the transmission request of the role opening command). Thereby, the first sub control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In the main control unit winning counter cleared in step S1202, only the value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the open variable winning opening of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is cleared. , The value of the main control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening that is not opened is maintained. Note that the value of any of the main control unit winning counters may be cleared. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special figure display determination weight processing is acquired, and in the next step S1205, a special power combination operation pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. As shown in FIGS. 16 (a-1) to 16 (a-3), for example, as shown in FIGS. FIG. 16 exemplarily shows only a part of them. The special power combination operation pattern data table stores special power combination operation data indicating an opening / closing pattern of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 for each round. As shown in FIGS. 15 (b-1) to 15 (b-3), the special electricity combination operation data includes information indicating the open / close state of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 (open timer pattern, One or a plurality of timer pattern data including a closed timer pattern) and information on a time for maintaining the open state or the closed state (special electric power open / close timer) are stored. Thus, various variations can be given to the opening and closing operations of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 during one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special map A, as shown in FIG. 16 (a-1), in the 1R to 15R, the special electricity combination operation data 1 shown in FIG. 16 (b-1) is referred to. After the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is terminated. Is done. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are configured to be opened alternately every round.

  In addition, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special map C, as shown in FIG. 16 (a-2), in the 1R to 4R, the 6R to 8R, and the 10R to 15R, the above-described special electric operation is performed. While the above-described operation is performed with reference to the data 1, on the 5th and 9th eyes, the special variable combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. Operation is controlled. That is, at the 5R and 9R, the first variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the first variable winning opening 234 is kept closed for 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1. Is executed four times, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened by the opening timer pattern 3 for 17500 ms, and thereafter, the first variable winning opening 234 is controlled by the closing timer pattern 3 to be closed and the operation is ended. You.

  In addition, in the big hit game in the case of the big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, at the 5th to 15th eyes, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is controlled with reference to the special electric winning combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. . That is, in the 5R to 15R, the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, and then the first variable winning opening 234 (second opening) is closed by the closing timer pattern 1. The second variable winning opening 235) is kept closed for 2820 ms, and then the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) is kept closed by the closing timer pattern 3 so that the operation ends. Is controlled. Before the closing pattern timer 3 is set, another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set.

  In step S1206, the number of times of operation of the special electric combination (number of rounds) is acquired, and in the next step S1207, the acquired number of operations of the special electric combination (number of rounds) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of times of operation of the special power combination (the number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1209, special power combination control processing (details will be described later) is performed, and in the next step S1210, the special power combination opening process is terminated after clearing the winning detection timer of the special power combination.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special power combination operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special power combination operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power combination operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special power combination operation state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S1301 of the special power combination operation process, the maximum winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained, and in step S1302, the winning number stored in the RAM 308 is obtained. In step S1303, the acquired maximum winning number is compared with the winning number, and it is determined whether the winning number is smaller than the maximum winning number. If the winning number is smaller (the winning number <the maximum winning number) (step S1303) : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304, otherwise (step S1303: No), otherwise (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special power combination opening / closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the close timer pattern being executed set in step S1208 of the special power combination opening process is greater than 0. If the open / close timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special power combination operation process is terminated. If not (if the special power combination open / close timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 is performed. Proceed to. In step S1305, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S1306, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is obtained. In the next step S1307, the closing timer pattern of the obtained special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is obtained. It is determined whether or not the special power combination is in operation (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is being operated (when the closing timer pattern is not set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special power combination operation process is terminated. If the special power combination is not operating (the closing timer pattern is set to the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special electric role remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 17 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special power combination operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. In step S1310, the other information signal transmission determination timer is cleared. In step S1311, a subcommand (large winning opening closing command) transmission request is issued. Set.

  In step S1312, the special power combination winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric winning combination detection timer refers to a large winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235) and a large winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235) after closing. ) Is a timer for effectively detecting a game ball remaining inside. In step S1313, the drive signal (big win opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the special winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235) is set to OFF, and then the special electric machine is operated. The operation processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are configured such that the maximum winning number of game balls passes through the passing area after the ball enters the easy-to-enter state. In addition, it functions as an example of a variable winning means that changes to a ball entry difficult state.

  Next, the special power combination control process (steps S1209 and S1305) executed in the special power combination opening process and the special power combination operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special power combination control process executed in the special power combination opening process and the special power combination operation process.

  In step S1401, the special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is obtained. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired from the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, which are set by reading and setting the special power combination operation data in step S1208 of the special power combination opening process. I do. For example, the operation pattern of the special power combination indicated in the special power combination operation data 1 is set, and at the start of the round, the “open timer pattern 2” shown in “(1)” of FIG. Is obtained. After the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 16B-1 is completed, the “close timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. The control data of "pattern 3" is obtained.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether to open or close the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234, second variable winning opening 235) based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special power combination. To get. For example, in the case of “open timer pattern”, data (opening information) for opening the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is obtained, and in the case of “closed timer pattern”, the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is obtained. Data (closure information) for closing the winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 is acquired. In the present embodiment, the odd variable round is a round in which the first variable winning opening 234 can be opened, and the even variable round is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 can be opened.

  In step S1403, an opening / closing timer of the special power combination is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, if “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When the “closed timer pattern 1” is acquired and the open / close information is “closed information”, a 2820 ms close timer is acquired.

  In step S1404, information indicating acceptability is set in the special power winning prize availability state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special prize winning state is acceptable is set, a game detection ball is provided in the variable winning opening (a first count switch SW1 of the first variable winning opening 234 or a second variable winning). It is possible to accept that the ball has passed through the second count switch SW2 of the mouth 235, and if information indicating that the game ball cannot be accepted is set, a ball detection sensor (first count switch) provided in the variable winning opening is set. SW1 and the second count switch SW2) are invalid even if passed. Here, only the count switch corresponding to the open variable winning opening of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is set to be acceptable. In step S1405, special power combination signal information (test signal) is set, and in step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. Specifically, only the bits of the special winning opening solenoid corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are cleared, and drive data is set for the bit of the special winning opening solenoid to be driven. In this process, preparations are made for driving the special winning opening solenoid, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, after setting the special power combination opening timer or the special power combination closing timer among the special power combination opening / closing timers, the special power combination control process ends. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a description will be given of the special electric power remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the special electric power remaining ball detection processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special electric role remaining ball detection processing is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “remaining sphere detection state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special electric role remaining ball detection processing, it is determined whether or not the special electric role activation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special electric combination operation processing is in operation. If it has not been performed (step S1501: Yes), the special electric role remaining sphere detection processing is ended. If not (if the special electric power actuation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), the process returns to step S1502. move on.

  In step S1502, the special power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating a "special power combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Accordingly, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special power combination operation end processing shown in FIG. 18 is called and executed. In other words, the state is the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after clearing the special power combination signal information (test signal), the special power combination remaining sphere detection processing ends. After clearing the special power combination signal information, a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special power combination operation end processing executed in the special figure state update processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special power combination operation end processing executed in the special figure state update processing. This special power combination operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special power combination operation end state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special power combination operation end processing, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special power combination remaining sphere detection processing is operating. If it is operating (step S1601: Yes) ), The special power combination operation end processing is ended, otherwise (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special figure hit / fail type is a small hit. If the small hit is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the process corresponds to the small hit in step S1603. After acquiring the win end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure win / fail type is not a small hit (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number is set to the maximum winning opening maximum number of times stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the maximum winning opening maximum number of times is compared with the special electric winning combination opening number, and it is determined whether the special electric winning opening number is less than the maximum winning opening maximum opening number, that is, whether the winning is not completed. . If the winning has not been completed (step S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-described special power combination opening process, and ends the special power combination operation end process. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, when the hit is completed (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is obtained, and in step S1608, the hit end display timer obtained in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thus, in step S602 of the next special figure state update processing, the hit end display weight processing shown in FIG. 19 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting the transmission request of the subcommand (hit end command), the special power combination operation end processing ends.

  Next, the hit end display wait processing executed in the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait processing executed in the special figure state update processing. The hit end display wait process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “hit end display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update processing. is there.

  In step S1701 of the hit end display wait processing, it is determined whether or not the hit end display timer set in step S1608 of the special power combination operation end processing is in operation. If the timer is in operation (step S1701: Yes), The hit end display weight processing ends, and if not (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1703, basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Set information indicating "waiting state". Thus, in the next step S602 of the special figure state update processing, the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. 10A is called and executed.

  In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winnings are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset. In step S1709, it is determined whether or not the game has ended with a small hit. If the game has ended with a small hit (step S1709: YES), the hit end display wait processing is performed. If the process has been completed and the process has been completed other than the small hit (the process has been completed with the big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, the setting data after the end of the hit (probability change, time saving, hidden probability change) is acquired. , Number of time savings (number of times of change of special figure fluctuation time, number of times of fluctuation time correction fluctuation, number of times of easy winning state change), time reduction status (special figure fluctuation time reduction status, general figure fluctuation time reduction status, open extension status), fluctuation time lottery The state (information for determining the fluctuating time lottery table, etc.) is set, and the setting data is cleared after the end of the hit, and then the hit end display wait processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 22A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S1801 in FIG. 22A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S1801. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S1803 following step S1801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1805. . In step S1805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S1807 following step S1805, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S1809 following step S1807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S1807, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed. The effect control processing will be described later.

  In step S1811 following step S1809, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S1809 to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136 is performed.

  In step S1813 following step S1811, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S1809 includes a command to the VDP 434, the command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S1815 following step S1813, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S1809 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S1817 following step S1815, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S1809 includes a command to the various lamps 418, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S1819 following step S1817, a shutter control process is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S1809 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S1821 subsequent to step S1819, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S1809, a setting is made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S1803.

  FIG. 22B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S1901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 22C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S2001 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S1803 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in Step S1803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S2003 following step S2001, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S1821), and other processes of updating the effect random number value And so on.

  FIG. 22D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S1813 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S2101, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S2103 following step S2101, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S2103: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2105. If not (step S2103: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S2105, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S2101, the CPU 404 obtains information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S2107 subsequent to step S2105, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S2109 subsequent to step S2107, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image rendering has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S2109: Yes), The process proceeds to step S2111; otherwise (step S2109: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S2111, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of scene images generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Subsequently, the effect control processing (step S1809) in the first sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. 22 will be described. FIG. 23A is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control process performed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S2201 of the effect control process, an over-winning sound output control process is performed, and in the next step S2203, a winning number display control process is performed. The details of the over winning sound output control processing and the winning number display control processing will be described later. In step S2205 subsequent to step S2203, other effect control processing is performed.

  FIG. 23B is a flowchart of the over-win winning sound output control processing. First, in step S2301 of the over-winning sound output control processing, the number of wins to the variable winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235) of the round being executed is acquired. Subsequently, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not the acquired winning number exceeds the maximum winning number. If it exceeds (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305, and a predetermined over winning from the speaker 120 is performed. After updating the effect data so that the sound is output, the over-winning-sound output control process ends. Specifically, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 counts the number of the special winning opening winning commands transmitted from the main control unit 300 since the round started, and updates the result in the RAM 408. are doing. If the counting result exceeds the maximum number of winnings in one round (for example, 10), the effect data updated in step S1809 of the first sub-controller main process is output as an over-winning sound. Perform processing to change to data. On the other hand, if the acquired winning number does not exceed the maximum winning number (step S2303: No), the over-winning-sound output control process ends without executing the process of step S2305.

  FIG. 23C is a flowchart of the winning number display control process. First, in step S2401 of the winning number display control process, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a round. Whether or not it is the timing of the start of the round is determined by determining whether or not a special power opening command has been received from the main control unit 300. If it is the timing of the start of the round (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2403 to clear the value of the winning number of the special winning opening in the RAM 408 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “sub-control unit winning counter”). I do. As for the sub-control unit winning counter to be cleared, only the value of the sub-control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening to be opened among the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is cleared, and is not opened. The value of the sub control unit winning counter corresponding to the variable winning opening is maintained. The value of any of the sub control unit winning counters may be cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the timing of the start of the round (step S2401: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without executing the process of step S2403.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the round is being performed. If the round is being performed (step S2405: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407 to open the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234 or the first variable winning opening 234). The value of the sub control unit winning counter corresponding to the two variable winning openings 235) is obtained. That is, the winning number of the open winning opening that is being opened is acquired. Subsequently, in step S2409, after the effect data is updated so that the display according to the acquired winning number is performed, the winning number display control process ends. By executing this processing, during the round of the big hit game, an effect display (for example, a display of the number of winnings or a winning effect) is performed according to the number of winnings.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 24A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S2501 of FIG. 24A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is performed in step S2501. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S2503 following step S2501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S2505. . In step S2505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S2507 subsequent to step S2505, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from first sub-control unit 400 or not.

  In step S2509 following step S2507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S2507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S2511 subsequent to step S2509, a lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In a step S2513 following the step S2511, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from first sub-control unit 400 to effect movable body 224, this command is output to drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S2503.

  FIG. 24B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S2601 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 24C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing. Execute in the cycle of In step S2601 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S2503 of the second sub control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S2503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S2603 following step S2601, an update process of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mainly on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 25 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25A, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image described later is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 has a fourth symbol display area 284 at the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) or not. From above, the symbol change notification area for the ordinary figure and the symbol change notification area for the special figure 1 are displayed from above. , The symbol change notification area of the special map 2. While the symbol in the ordinary figure is stopped, the square figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the ordinary figure fluctuates, the square figure blinks or is turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is illuminated and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 2 fluctuates, the triangular figure blinks or is turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position, but also has a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can identify the symbol at a glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 25 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. . The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lighting of Toku-zu 1 reserved lamp 218. In addition, the number is also represented by the number of reserved icons in the special map 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side has the older winning icon, and in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon is.

  In FIG. 25A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 25A, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 25 is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), so that the power chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because In addition, in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a line defining the area is not actually displayed, but in FIG. Is shown by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line defining an area may be provided, or a line defining an area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the reserved icon display area of the other special figure is displayed on the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 25A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserve icon of Toku-zu 2 is a square, plain pattern and white display mode. Here, the shape is also different, so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the order of the change start in the special figure display device → the start of blinking or turning off of the fourth symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → the start of change of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 25 (b), the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol change is started in the first special figure display device 212, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 25C, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has been started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and the second hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

  In FIG. 25 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 25 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the holding icon, which was the second holding icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. Note that when the symbol change on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (g), an operation prompt notification image 136P for urging the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol change display is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. The change display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize from the fourth symbol 284 or the like that the special figure is changing. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 25 (h), the validity period has decreased, and in FIG. 25 (i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 25 (j), the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, a character display of "CHANCE" is displayed on the right side of the main character image.

  In FIG. 25 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the display of the change of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the apparatus enters the reach state as shown in FIG. Although the reach state entry notice image 207 may be displayed, the vehicle may not enter the reach state in some cases, but may enter the reach state.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that is a trigger of a notice of the currently performed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 25 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (o) shows a duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman. The animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of entering a reach state but also a notice of evolving to super reach.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 25.

  In FIG. 26 (p) following FIG. 25 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 26 (s). In FIG. 26 (s), the protagonist of the hero defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 26 (t), the whole is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that a background image different from the background image may be displayed instead of non-display. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 7 (u), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-display or a different background image. In addition, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain disappearing, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (v), the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" with the 15R certain-variable-big-hit determination is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 26 (v) is lit. In FIG. 26 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 26 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, FIG. 25 (l) shows a case where the reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination of a 5R probability variable hit, a 5R normal hit, and a 2R normal hit), which is another diagram following FIG. 26 (t). In FIG. 26 (u ′), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6−decoration 6−decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 26 (v ′) following FIG. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 26 (w ′) subsequent to FIG. 26 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here).

  FIG. 27: is a figure which shows an example of the effect of another case following FIG.26 (q) step by step.

  In FIG. 27 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 25 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 27 (b). In FIG. 27 (b), the main character, the lord, loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 27 (c), as in FIG. 26 (t), the whole is temporarily hidden except the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 27D, the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are restored, and the fluctuating icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. Is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, an animation for erasing the variable icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 11F, the erasing animation of the fluctuating icon h0 is started. In FIG. 10G, the erasing animation is continued, and the fluctuating icon h0 is completely erased in FIG. Note that an animation for erasing the fluctuating icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the jackpot game will be described in detail.

  FIG. 28 is a timing chart for explaining the operation from the start to the end of the big hit game.

  In FIG. 28, in order from the top, the fluctuation state of Toku-zu 1, the fluctuation state of Toku-zu 2, the state of the large winning opening 1 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the first variable winning opening 234, and the state of the second variable winning opening 235. The state of the special winning opening 2 solenoid that opens and closes, the status of the special figure fluctuation time reduction, and the number of remaining hours are shown. In FIG. 28, the period indicated by “α” indicates a period in which the special figure display is determined by the above-described special figure display determination timer, and is indicated by “β”. The period indicates a period in which the above-mentioned hit start display timer is set and a big hit (small hit) start effect is performed, and in the period indicated by “δ”, the above-mentioned special electric-power combination operation interval timer is set. This indicates a period in which the remaining sphere is detected, and a period indicated by “ε” indicates a period in which the above-described special power combination operation delay timer is set and an interval effect is performed between rounds. The period indicated by “ζ” indicates a period in which the above-mentioned hit end display timer is set and a big hit end effect is performed. When the special figure variation time shortening status is “0”, it indicates that the special figure is a low probability general figure low probability state (normal game state), and when “1”, the special figure low probability general figure is set. A high probability state (time saving state) is indicated, and a value of "2" indicates a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probable change state).

  As shown in FIG. 28, after the symbol change of the special figure 1 is started at the timing of ta01, the symbol change of the special figure 1 ends at the timing of ta02. At this time, in the special figure 1, when the symbol (eg, "special figure F") which becomes the 5R normal jackpot is stopped, after the period (α1) set by the special figure display determination timer elapses, at the timing of ta03. The big hit start effect is started, and the big hit start effect is performed until the period (β1) set by the hit start display timer elapses. Note that the hit start display timer may be set to “0”, or may be set to a very short time (for example, 4 ms). For example, when the first round is started immediately after the symbol variation display is finished, or when the special figure display determination timer α is given a long time and a big hit start effect is performed in that period, It may be adopted when the effect of indicating that three decorative symbols are aligned during the variable display of the figure is made longer, or when the right-handed notification is not performed.

  When the big hit start effect ends and the timing of ta04 is reached, the first round is started, and since the round is an odd number round, the big winning opening 1 solenoid is driven to open the first variable winning opening 234. After that, the first variable winning opening 234 wins the game ball of the maximum winning number described above, or the set special power combination operation data (for example, is set in the first round in the case of a big hit in “Tokuzu F”). When the opening timer set by the “special electricity combination operation data 1” elapses, the driving of the special winning opening 1 solenoid stops at the timing of ta05, and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed.

  Then, the special power combination operation interval timer is set at the timing of ta05, and when the set period (δ1) elapses and the timing of ta06 is reached, the first round ends, and the special power combination activation delay timer is set. After that, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer has elapsed and the timing of ta07 has come, the second round is started. In the present embodiment, the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer is set as the period between rounds. Here, the period of the inter-round interval may be the period indicated by A in the drawing or the period indicated by B in the drawing. In other words, the period indicated by A is a period from when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special winning opening closing command from the main control unit 300 to when it receives the special winning opening opening command in the next round. The period from when the driving of the special winning opening 1 solenoid is stopped and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed to when the special winning opening 2 solenoid is driven and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in the next round. It is also a period. Further, a period indicated by B is a period from the time when the special power combination 1 to be described later is changed from the operating state to the inactive state until the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operating state to the operating state in the next round. When the section 300 is configured to be able to transmit the inter-round interval start command, the first sub-control section 400 receives the inter-round interval start command from the main control section 300 and then sets the special winning opening opening command in the next round. It is also a period until receiving.

  When the second round is started at the timing of ta07, since the round is an even-numbered round, the big winning opening 2 solenoid is driven to open the second variable winning opening 235. Thereafter, the game ball having the maximum number of winnings described above is awarded to the second variable winning opening 235, or is set in the second round in a case where a special hitting operation data (for example, a special hit F is hit) is set. When the opening timer set by the “special electricity combination operation data 1” elapses, the drive of the special winning opening 2 solenoid stops at the timing of ta08, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed.

  Then, the special power combination operation interval timer is set at the timing of ta08, and when the set period (δ2) elapses and the timing of ta09 is reached, the second round ends, and the special power combination activation delay timer is set. Thereafter, when a period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of ta10 comes, the third round is started. Thereafter, the above-described operation is repeatedly performed until the fifth round is completed (ta10 to ta16).

  In this way, the big hit game is performed, and at the timing of ta16, the big hit end effect starts, and the big hit end effect is performed until the period (# 1) set by the hit end display timer elapses. Note that the hit end display timer may be set to “0”, or may be set to a very short time (for example, 4 ms). For example, in a jackpot game of 15R (substantially 8R) jackpot, when a jackpot end effect is performed between the ninth round and the fifteenth round, a jackpot end display timer is set and the jackpot end effect is performed during this period. There is no need to perform this, and it may be adopted in such a case.

  When the big hit end effect ends and the timing of ta17 comes, the big hit game ends, and the symbol change of the special figure 1 is started. At this time, since the gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time reduction state), the special figure change time reduction status becomes “1” where the reduction of the special figure change is permitted, and the number of time reductions is “ 100 ".

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure is stopped and displayed, the timing when the variable winning opening (attacker) starts the first opening, or the big winning opening solenoid is turned on first. May be reached.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the variable winning opening (attacker) finally changes from “open” to “closed”, or the large winning opening solenoid signal finally changes from on to off. It may be timing.

  FIG. 29 is a timing chart for explaining the operation timing of the first variable winning opening (first attacker) and the second variable winning opening (second attacker) in the big hit game.

  In FIG. 29, in order from the top, the fluctuating state of the special figure 1, the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of the large winning opening 1 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the first variable winning opening 234, the first state The operating state of the special electric auditorium (special electric part 1) related to the variable winning opening 234, the setting state of the special electric part winning detection timer (special electric part 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234, the setting of the first count switch SW1. Valid / invalid state, state of large winning opening 2 solenoid driving opening / closing of second variable winning opening 235, operation state of special electric accessory (special electric part 2) related to second variable winning opening 235, second variable winning opening 235 shows the setting state of the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) and the valid / invalid state of the second count switch SW2. Here, the accessory continuous operation device refers to a special device capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory (in this embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235), A condition device is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the continuous action device, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, or a game ball (when the continuous action device is activated) Excluding those that have opened the entrance or won the enlarged special winning opening.) Means that the device operates when passing through a specific area within the special winning opening. Since the timing at which the operation of the condition device starts and the timing at which the operation ends, the condition device is represented by the same timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the special figure 1 fluctuates, and thereafter, at the timing of tb01, the design fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends, and a pattern (for example, “special figure A”) that becomes a 15R probability variation big hit is obtained. When the stop display is performed, after the period (α1) set by the special figure display determination timer has elapsed, the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device change from the non-operation state to the operation state at the timing of tb02. That is, the big hit game is started at the timing of tb02. Then, the big hit start effect is started at this timing, and the big hit start effect is performed until the period (β1) set by the hit start display timer elapses.

  When the big hit start effect ends and the timing of tb03 is reached, the first round is started, and the odd round is performed. Then, since the first variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the first round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 1 is activated. Thus, when a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has passed through the first count switch SW1, it can be effectively detected and treated as having effectively won the first variable winning opening 234. Become like Note that the first count switch SW1 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, the first variable winning opening 234 wins the game ball of the maximum winning number described above, or is set in the first round in the case of a special hit combination operation data (for example, a big hit in “Tokuzu A”). When the opening timer set by the “special electricity combination operation data 1” elapses, the driving of the special winning opening 1 solenoid stops at the timing of tb04, and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234. The period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer may be referred to as a first valid period. In the present embodiment, when the special power combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric combination 1 remains in the operating state after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (δ1) set by the special electric combination operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special power combination operation timer elapses and reaches the timing of tb05, the first round ends, the special power combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operation state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. You. After that, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tb06 comes, the second round is started. Since this is an even round, the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Become. In the present embodiment, the special power combination 1 and the special power combination 2 do not operate at the same time. Since the second variable winning opening 235 is opened from the start of the second round, the big winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. The second count switch SW2 changes from an invalid state to a valid state at a timing when the special power combiner 2 is activated. Thus, when a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 has passed through the second count switch SW2, this can be effectively detected and treated as having effectively won the second variable winning opening 235. Become like In this embodiment, even after the second variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses. When the two variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round may pass through the first count switch SW1 and be detected as a winning. Note that the second count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when a period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses, the first count switch SW1 is disabled at a timing of tb07.

  Thereafter, a winning of the game ball of the maximum winning number described above into the second variable winning opening 235 or the set special power combination operation data (for example, the second special round is set in the second round in the case of a big hit in “special map A”) When the opening timer set by the “special electricity combination operation data 1” elapses, the drive of the special winning opening 2 solenoid stops at the timing of tb08, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. At this time, the special power combination activation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235. The period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer may be referred to as a second valid period. In the present embodiment, when the special power combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the second count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 2 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special power combination 2 remains in the operating state even after the second variable winning opening 235 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses. It has become.

  When the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation timer elapses and the timing of tb09 is reached, the second round ends, the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operation state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. You. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tb10 is reached, the third round is started, and since this is an odd round, the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Become. Since the first variable winning opening 234 is opened from the start of the third round, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 1 is activated. In the present embodiment, even after the first variable winning opening 234 has been opened, the second count switch SW2 is in the valid state until the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses. When the one variable winning opening 234 is in the open state, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 in the previous round may pass through the second count switch SW2 and be detected as winning. In the present embodiment, since the same special power combination operation data (“special power combination operation data 1”) is used for the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, the opening time of the first variable winning opening 234 is set. And the opening time of the second variable winning opening 235 is the same time. However, different special electric winning combination operation data may be set for the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235. Further, special power combination operation data used only in one of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 may be prepared.

  After that, when the period set by the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 becomes invalid at the timing of tb11.

  After that, when the game balls with the maximum number of winnings described above enter the first variable winning opening 234, or when the opening timer set by the set special power combination operation data elapses, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is set at the timing of tb12. The driving is stopped and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Hereinafter, the above-described operation is repeatedly performed until the final round, fifteen rounds, is completed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the state of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 30 in a stepwise manner. 32 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 31.

  FIG. 30 shows the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold. Lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 30 also shows a first variable winning opening 234 that is a first attacker and a second variable winning opening 235 that is a second attacker. Corresponding to the number of balls entering the variable winning opening 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub-control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning opening 235, the number of balls entering the second variable winning opening 235, the main control. The section winning counter 2 and the sub-control section winning counter 2 are shown. Here, the number of entered balls indicates the number of game balls received in the first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235) in one round, and the first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2). It does not matter whether or not it has passed. The main control unit prize counter 1 and the main control unit prize counter 2 store the number of prizes to the first variable prize port 234 and the second variable prize port 235 in one round stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. It is a counter shown. The sub control unit prize counter 1 and the sub control unit prize counter 2 are counters indicating the number of prizes to the first variable prize port 234 and the second variable prize port 235 in one round stored in the RAM 308 of the sub control unit 400. It is. The sub control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 2 are counted when a special winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. Further, in the present embodiment, the speaker 120 is also shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 30 (a), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit. Note that the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol display area 284 have disappeared.

In FIG. 30 (b), the first round, which is the first round of the 15 round jackpot game, is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 30 (b) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. 30 (b), a 1R character display (round number display) is provided at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (b). The round number display is started at a timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, but may be started at the same timing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a haniwa character C1 imitating a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display for the first round including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This “decoration 7” is continuously displayed until the big hit game end effect starts.
Therefore, it is continuously displayed even during the interval between rounds. FIG. 30B shows a state in which one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is effectively won. The display of “decoration 7” may be deleted during the interval between rounds.

  Also in FIG. 30C, the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. Also, the number of rounds display is continued at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued. In FIG. 30 (c), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and two game balls are received by the first variable winning opening 234, and the first count switch SW1 is still in operation. Are not passed.

  In FIG. 30D, the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10”, and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed, and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 1R characters are still displayed in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round has been continued. That is, FIG. 30D shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 (one scene with a different number of brilliant images br) shown in FIG. 30D corresponds to the effect of ending the opening of the attacker in the first round. Also, in FIG. 30D, one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown moving. This gaming ball is the eleventh winning ball in the first variable winning opening 234, and can be regarded as a gaming ball that wins (over-wins) exceeding the maximum winning number.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 30E, when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds comes, the character display of 1R at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Good. Alternatively, the round number display may be continuously displayed until the next round (for example, the second round) starts. Also, in FIG. 30 (e), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 30 (d) has not yet passed the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the period of FIG. 30E may be an interval between rounds, or the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIGS. Considering the effect, the period shown in FIGS. 30D to 30E may be set as the interval between rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round that is started after the first round. Thus, it can be said that it functions as an example of the second effect means capable of executing the inter-round interval effect.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 31 (f), the second round is started. The second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 11F is opened, the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect exclusively for the second round including the character C1. (Effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and 2R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, in FIG. 31 (f), the winning in the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet occurred. On the other hand, in FIG. 31 (f), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 30 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, even after the round (the second round) is started, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round (the first round) still has a winning. It may not be in the state.

  Also in FIG. 31 (g), the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, the number of rounds is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display for the second round is also continuously performed. I have. Further, in FIG. 31 (g), one game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is effectively won, one game ball is received by the second variable winning opening 235, and the second count switch SW2 is still in the state. Are not passed. On the other hand, FIG. 31 (g) shows a state in which the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 31 (f) has passed the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count the eleventh winning "11". Then, an eleventh prize in the first variable prize port 234 generates an over prize, and as shown in FIG. 31 (g), an over prize sound (the first over prize sound) notifying the fact from the speaker 120. (Winning sound) is output.

  FIG. 31H shows a state in which the time set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer has elapsed and the first count switch SW1 has been disabled. Accordingly, thereafter, even if the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 until the special power combination 1 is operated again, it is determined that the winning of the game ball into the first variable winning opening 234 is invalid. Note that the passage of the game ball by the first count switch SW1 may not be detected. Further, if a game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 in a state where the first count switch SW1 is invalid, an error may be determined. In the present embodiment, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 1 keep the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 until the first variable winning opening 234 is opened next time. , And are cleared when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened again. In FIG. 31 (h), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (g) passes through the second count switch SW2 and is treated as a valid winning, and The control unit prize counter 2 and the sub control unit prize counter 2 each count "2" as the second prize, and one more game ball is received in the second variable prize port 235, and the second count is still performed. The state not passing through the switch SW2 is shown.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (i), the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “10”, the number of winnings to the second variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. The state in which the remaining ball detection state ends and the interval between rounds is reached is shown. In FIG. 32 (i), the character display of 2R displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has disappeared. In FIG. 32 (i), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the second variable winning opening 235 but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2 is rolled in the second variable winning opening 235. It is shown moving. This game ball is an eleventh winning ball in the second variable winning opening 235, and can be said to be an over-winning gaming ball.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (j), the third round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 11J is opened, the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect exclusively for the third round including the character C1. (Effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and a 3R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 32 (j), the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet been won. On the other hand, in FIG. 32 (j), the game ball rolling in the second variable winning opening 235 in FIG. 32 (i) has not yet passed the second count switch SW2 and is still rolling. It is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, even after the round (the third round) is started, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 in the previous round (the second round) still has a winning. It may not be in the state.

  Also in FIG. 32 (k), the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, the number of rounds is continuously displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display for the third round is also continuously performed. I have. FIG. 32 (k) shows a state where one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234 and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. On the other hand, FIG. 32 (k) shows a state in which the game ball rolling in the second variable winning opening 235 in FIG. 32 (j) has passed through the second count switch SW2. At this time, since the special power combination 2 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the second count switch SW2 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning in the second variable winning opening 235, The main control unit winning counter 2 and the sub control unit winning counter 2 each count the eleventh winning "11". Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning in the second variable winning opening 235, and as shown in FIG. (Winning sound) is output. The over-winning sound corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the over-winning sound corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 may be the same sound or different sounds.

  Thereafter, 3 to 15 rounds are also digested as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the speaker 120 functions as a first effect unit capable of executing an over-winning effect when a game ball enters the variable winning unit exceeding the maximum winning number.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 and the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the present embodiment, the area for storing the winning number is divided for each variable winning opening 234, 235, so that the first count switch SW1 is effective. Even if a game ball wins in the first variable winning opening 234 during a period in which a certain period overlaps with the period in which the second count switch SW2 is valid, the first sub control unit 400 wins the first variable winning opening 234. Therefore, the effect can be performed according to the information from the main control unit 300, and the player can be relieved in some cases.

<First Modification>
Next, a first modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit, and is a diagram showing a state in which the winning number for each round is displayed in a stepwise manner.

  FIGS. 33 (b), (c), (e), (f) and (g) are respectively FIGS. 30 (b), (c) and (e). 31 (f) and FIG. 31 (g), except that the winning number display indicating the winning number for each round is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The winning number display changes according to the counter values indicated by the sub-control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2, and can be regarded as an example of a winning effect. Also, this winning number display can be said to be an example of a winning effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of one round in the big hit game to the end of the round. .

  In this effect example, in FIG. 33 (e), the round number display is deleted at the timing after the maximum winning number “10” is displayed on the winning number display. The display of the number of winnings is continuously displayed even during the interval between rounds. The round number display may be erased at the same timing as the winning number display, or the winning number display may be erased before the start of the period between rounds.

  In this effect example, the winning number display is used for both the one corresponding to the winning number to the first variable winning opening 234 and the one corresponding to the winning number to the second variable winning opening 235. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), when the round starts and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the winning number display is cleared to “0”, and the winning number display is changed to the first variable winning. The display corresponding to the number of winning balls in the mouth 234 is changed from the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235. The timing of starting the display of the number of rounds may be the same as the timing of clearing the display of the number of winnings, or the displaying of the number of rounds may be started at a timing after the display of the number of winnings is cleared. Further, the winning number display may be cleared at a timing after the start of the round number display. Further, the display mode of the winning number display is not limited to the one displayed by a number, and may be represented by, for example, the number of displayed symbols, characters, or the number of icons. The display of the number of winnings is not limited to being simply represented by a number, but may be a mode in which the winning number is combined with character information such as “1GET” and “2GET”. In the present embodiment, the winning number display is displayed in a count-up manner, but may be displayed in a count-down manner. In this production example, the case where the second variable winning opening 235 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state has been described, but the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. When the first variable winning opening 234 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display is cleared to "0" at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. The number display is changed from the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235 to the display corresponding to the number of winning balls to the first variable winning opening 234.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a second effect unit that can execute a winning effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning unit.

<Second Modification>
Next, a second modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit, in which the display according to the total number of game balls winning the variable winning opening from the start of the big hit game is stepwise. FIG.

  34 (b), FIG. 34 (c), FIG. 34 (e), FIG. 34 (f), and FIG. 34 (g) are FIGS. 30 (b), 30 (c), and FIG. 31 (f) and FIG. 31 (g), a display corresponding to the total number of winnings in the variable winning openings in the big hit game (the total number of winnings) is displayed at the center on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The difference is that it is displayed. In this production example, the total number of winning prizes is displayed as the total number of prize balls (total prize balls obtainable) that can be obtained by winning the variable prize openings in the jackpot game, and the variable prize is displayed from the start of the jackpot game to the present. The display is performed in such a manner that the number of prize balls (acquired prize balls) acquired by winning the mouth can be specified. For example, in this production example, the number of prize balls that can be acquired by winning one game ball in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is 15, and the maximum winning number in one round is 10, If, in all of the 15 rounds, 10 game balls can be won in the variable winning openings 234 and 235, 2250 award balls can be obtained. 2250 "is displayed, and the value obtained by multiplying the number of game balls that have won the variable winning openings 234 and 235 by 15 from the start of the jackpot game to the present is displayed as the number of acquired award balls. Is done. It should be noted that instead of the acquired number of prize balls, the number of game balls that have won the variable winning opening may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the over-winning portion is not included in the acquired number of prize balls (the total number of winnings in the variable winning opening in the big hit game), but may be included.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the total number of winnings is continuously displayed even during the interval between rounds. The display of the total number of winnings may be deleted during the interval between rounds.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above, the amount of over-winning is not included in the acquired number of winning prize balls. Therefore, in FIG. 34 (g), the game balls to the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are set. The number of wins is 12 while the total number of wins displayed is "165" corresponding to 11 wins. As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize means from the time the variable prize means enters the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state becomes the maximum prize. It functions as an example of a second effect unit that can execute a winning effect that can be changed to a number corresponding to the number. The total winning display including the over-winning winnings may be set to “180” corresponding to 12 wins. Further, the display mode of the winning total number display is not limited to being displayed by numbers, and may be represented by, for example, the number of displayed symbols, characters, or the number of icons. The display of the number of winnings is not limited to being simply represented by a number, but may be a mode in which the information is combined with character information such as “1000 GET”, “2000 GET”, and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, the winning total number display is displayed in a count-up manner, but may be displayed in a count-down manner.

  In this example of production, when the number of over-winning prizes is displayed in the number of acquired prize balls, the display is such that the number of acquired prize balls is larger than the total number of obtainable prize balls (for example, “2280 / 2250 pt "or a display that changes the total number of obtainable prize balls in accordance with the number of obtained prize balls (for example, the display of the original total number of obtainable prize balls is" 2250 pt ", If the acquired award ball number is “2280”, “2280 / 2280pt” may be displayed). Further, in this effect example, the display for increasing the number of acquired prize balls is performed. However, for example, a display for decreasing the total number of obtainable prize balls (for example, a display such as “remaining 2250 pt”) may be performed. In this case, an over-prize may not be included or may be included. Here, when the amount of over-winning is not included, when the game ball is won to the variable winning openings 234 and 235 by the maximum winning number in all rounds from the start to the end of the big hit game, For example, "0 pt remaining" will be displayed. In addition, when the over-winning portion is included, “0 pt remaining” may be displayed before the end of a certain round (for example, the 15th round). If there is a winning of the game ball, the display of "0 pt remaining" may be continuously displayed. For example, a display using minus such as "-30 pt remaining" or "0 pt remaining + bonus point" A display such as "30pt" or "bonus point 30pt" may be displayed so that the number of prize balls additionally acquired by the over-prize can be recognized, or an over-prize such as "remaining, large-plate running" or "large-plate running" may be displayed. A display that allows the player to recognize that the player has performed the game (display indicating that the number of acquired prize balls is larger than the originally obtainable number of prize balls) may be performed.

<Third Modification>
Next, a third modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit, and is a diagram showing stepwise how the winning number per round is displayed for each variable winning opening.

  FIGS. 35 (b), (c), (e), (f) and (g) are respectively FIGS. 30 (b), (c) and (e). 31 (f) and FIG. 31 (g), except that the winning number display for each variable winning opening indicating the winning number for each round is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the winning number corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 is displayed in the “upper attacker” column, and the winning number corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is “ Lower attacker ". Further, in this effect example, the number of winnings is displayed so as not to be included in the number of winnings, the number of winnings is displayed. However, the number of winnings may be displayed including the number of winnings.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the winning number display is continuously performed even during the interval between rounds. The winning number display may be deleted during the interval between rounds.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), even if the second round starts and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the winning number display corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 is displayed as follows. The value is maintained at "10" indicating that 10 winnings have been made, and is continued until the first variable winning opening 234 is opened next.

  Also, in this effect example, as described above, the amount of over-winning is not included in the number of awarded balls acquired, and therefore, in FIG. 35 (g), the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is shown. The winning number display of the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained at “10” indicating that 10 winnings have been achieved, while the winning number of the “11” is 11 pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 increases the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize means from when the variable prize means enters the easy-to-enter state to when the variable prize means enters the difficult-to-enter state. It functions as an example of a second effect means capable of executing a winning effect that can be changed to a corresponding number. In addition, the winning number display corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 may be set to “11” indicating that 11 winnings have been won, including the over winning. In this production example, a case has been described where the second variable winning opening 235 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state, but the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. When the first variable winning opening 234 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is displayed even if the first variable winning opening 234 is opened. It will be maintained until the second variable winning opening 235 is opened next time.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a fourth modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this modification, the sub-control unit winning counter in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is used in common for the one corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234 and the one corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235. This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining another embodiment in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit, and is a diagram showing a state in a case where the first variable winning opening is won across the rounds in a stepwise manner; FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 36 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the continuation of the jackpot game at the 15R special jackpot shown in FIG. 37 in a stepwise manner. is there.

  36, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the special figure Two holding lamps 220 and a general-purpose holding lamp 216 are shown. FIG. 36 also shows a first variable winning port 234 that is a first attacker and a second variable winning port 235 that is a second attacker. The number of balls entering the variable winning opening 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, and the number of balls entering the second variable winning opening 235 and the main controlling unit winning counter 2 corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 are shown. Have been. In the present embodiment, one sub-control unit winning counter corresponding to both the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is shown, and is provided in the RAM 308 of the sub-control unit 400. The sub control unit winning counter is counted when a big winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. In FIG. 36, the illustration of the speaker 120 is omitted.

  In FIG. 36 (a), as the big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit. Note that the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol display area 284 have disappeared.

  In FIG. 36 (b), the first round, which is the first round of the 15 round jackpot game, is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 36B is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is kept in the open state. Further, at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36B, 1R character display (round number display) is performed. The round number display is started at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, but may be started at the same timing. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a haniwa character C1 imitating a cactus appears as a big hit game effect, and an effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This "decoration 7" is continuously displayed until the big hit game end effect starts. Therefore, it is continuously displayed even during the interval between rounds. At the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the number of winnings for each round is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The winning number display is displayed based on the value indicated by the sub control unit winning counter. FIG. 36B shows a state in which one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 has been effectively won, and the winning number display is “1”.

  Also in FIG. 36 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. Also, the number of rounds display is continued at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display dedicated to the first round is also continued. In FIG. 36 (c), seven game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234, and the first count switch SW1 is still in operation. Are not passed. Therefore, the winning number display is “7”.

  In FIG. 36 (d), when the opening timer set by the special power combination operation data set as described above elapses, even if the number of winnings to the first variable winning opening 234 does not reach the maximum number of winnings. The first variable winning opening 234 is closed, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 1R characters are still displayed in the upper left corner and “decoration 7” is displayed in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the first round has been continued. That is, FIG. 36D shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the first round including the character C1 (one scene having a different number of brilliant images br) shown in FIG. 36D corresponds to the effect of the opening end of the attacker of the first round. Also, in FIG. 36 (d), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown moving. This game ball is a game ball that becomes the eighth prize in the first variable winning port 234. That is, in the first round in this effect example, it can be said that the over-winning prize has not occurred, but the winning number display is being performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of the second effect unit that can execute the winning effect even when the over-winning effect is not executed.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds comes, the character display of 1R at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. Good. In FIG. 36 (e), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 36 (d) has not yet passed the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the period shown in FIG. 36E may be an inter-round interval, or the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIGS. Considering the effect, the period shown in FIGS. 36 (d) to 36 (e) may be set as the interval between rounds.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 37 (f), the second round is started. The second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 11F is opened, the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect exclusively for the second round including the character C1. (Effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and 2R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the value of the sub control unit winning counter is cleared, and the winning number display is also "0". Also, in FIG. 37 (f), no prize has been won in the second variable prize port 235. On the other hand, in FIG. 37 (f), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 36 (d) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, even after the round (the second round) is started, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round (the first round) still has a winning. It may not be in the state.

  Also in FIG. 37 (g), the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state, the number of rounds is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display for the second round is also continuously performed. I have. FIG. 37 (g) shows a state where the ball has not yet entered the second variable winning opening 235. On the other hand, FIG. 37 (g) shows a state where the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 37 (f) has passed the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 counts the eighth winning “8”, but the sub-control unit 400 determines that there has been a winning in the first variable winning opening since the start of the second round. Therefore, the sub-control unit winning counter counts “1” as the first winning. Therefore, the winning number display is also “1”.

  FIG. 37 (h) shows a state in which the time set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer has elapsed and the first count switch SW1 has been disabled. Accordingly, thereafter, even if the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 until the special power combination 1 is operated again, it is determined that the winning of the game ball into the first variable winning opening 234 is invalid. In the present embodiment, the main control unit winning counter 1 is stored and held in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 until the first variable winning opening 234 is next opened, and the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened again. Is cleared. In FIG. 37 (h), three game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235, and two of the game balls pass through the second count switch SW2 and are treated as a valid winning. The section winning counter 2 indicates that "2" is counted. Note that the remaining one game ball has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. In this embodiment, as described above, since one game ball has passed the first count switch SW1 after the start of the second round, the sub control unit winning counter has already counted “1”. In this state, since two game balls have won, the sub control unit winning counter counts "3", and the winning number display is also "3".

  Subsequently, in FIG. 37 (i), ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235, and nine of the game balls pass through the second count switch SW2 and are treated as valid winning. The main control unit winning counter 2 indicates that “9” is counted. Note that the remaining one game ball has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. As described above, the sub control unit winning counter counts "10" including the passage of one game ball to the first count switch SW1 after the start of the second round. The winning number display is also “10”. However, the value of the main control unit winning counter 2 indicates “9”, and in the second round, the number of game balls won to the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet reached the maximum winning number. The two-variable winning opening 235 is kept open. That is, FIG. 37 (i) shows that the winning number indicates “10” on the display on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the second round has not been completed yet.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 37 (j), the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “10” and the number of winnings in the second variable winning opening 234 reaches the maximum winning number, so the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. , The second variable winning opening 235 is in a closed state. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, 2R characters are still displayed in the upper left corner and "decoration 7" is displayed in the upper right corner. Furthermore, the effect display for the second round has been continued. That is, FIG. 37 (j) shows that the remaining sphere is detected. One scene of the effect display dedicated to the second round including the character C1 (one scene having a different number of brilliant images br) shown in FIG. 37 (j) corresponds to the effect of ending the opening of the attacker in the second round. In FIG. 37 (j), there is no game ball that exceeds the maximum winning number in the second variable winning opening 235. In FIG. 37 (j), as described above, the sub control unit winning counter indicates “11” including the passage of one game ball to the first count switch SW1 after the start of the second round. Although it is counted, the winning number display is still "10". As described above, in the present embodiment, in the second round, the number of winning of the game balls to the second variable winning opening 235 is 10, and no substantial over-winning occurs, but the second round starts. Since the winning of one game ball into the first variable winning opening 234 has occurred since then, it can be said that an apparent over-winning has occurred. In this case, “11” may be displayed in the winning number display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds comes, the 2R character display at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. At this time, an effect peculiar to the interval between rounds may be performed. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. Good. In the present embodiment, the period of FIG. 38 (k) may be an interval between rounds, or the effect display including the character C1 shown in FIG. 37 (j) to FIG. Considering the effect, the period of FIG. 37 (j) to FIG. 38 (k) may be set as an interval between rounds.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 38 (l), the third round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 11 (l) is opened, the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect exclusively for the third round including the character C1. (Effect display in which the number of brilliant images br is different) is started, and 3R character display (round number display) is performed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, in FIG. 38 (l), the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet been won.

  FIGS. 38 (i ′) and (j ′) are the same as FIGS. 37 (i) and (j), except that the speaker 120 is shown and an over-winning sound is output. ing. In FIG. 38 (j ′) following FIG. 38 (i ′), as described above with reference to FIG. 37 (j), no substantial over-winning has occurred, but the sub-control unit winning counter has “ 11 ", and when an over-winning prize occurs, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the over-winning sound output when a substantial over-winning occurs and the over-winning sound output when the over-winning apparently occurs may be the same or different. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (j ″), the number of winnings is indicated by the number of winnings / variable winnings in the variable winning opening from the start of the round (for example, in the example shown in FIG. 38 (j ″), "10/10").

  In the present embodiment, an over-winning sound is output when an apparent over-winning occurs. For example, there are eleven game balls entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235. The over-winning sound also occurs when an over-winning occurs (substantial over-winning occurs) in the remaining ball detection state before the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are opened after the round starts or during the interval between rounds. May be output. Here, if there is a winning of the eleventh game ball after the start of the next round, the value of the sub control unit winning counter is cleared when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. If the eleventh game ball wins after the next round has started, no over-winning sound is output.

  Further, in this effect example, after the first variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the winning in the first variable winning opening 234 occurs after the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. As described above, after the second variable winning opening 235 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the winning in the second variable winning opening 235 occurs after the first variable winning opening 234 is changed to the open state. Needless to say, the same can be applied to such a case.

  In this effect example, the sub-control unit winning counters for the first variable winning opening 234 (sub-control unit winning counter 1) and the second variable winning opening 235 (sub-control) as in the above-described embodiment. The sub-control unit winning counter 1 counts the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235. The sub control unit winning counter 2 may be configured to count the number of game balls. In this case, for example, when the second round starts and the second variable winning opening 235 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the winning number display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes “0”, and the second variable winning opening is displayed. The winning number display for the mouth 235 is started. After that, when the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 and is treated as a valid winning in the first variable winning opening 234, the winning number display is performed. May be configured to be displayed after being counted up.

<Fifth Modification>
Next, a fifth modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining another display mode in the big hit game, and is a diagram showing a stage of the effect display performed every time a game ball wins in the variable winning opening, and FIG. ') Is a diagram illustrating another display mode following FIG. 39 (h), and FIG. 40 (l ′) is a diagram illustrating another display mode following FIG. 39 (j).

  FIG. 39 shows the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of balls entering the first variable winning opening 234 corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning opening are shown. The number of balls entering the second variable winning opening 235 corresponding to 235 and the main control unit winning counter 2 are shown.

  In FIG. 39 (a), the first round, which is the first round in the jackpot game, is started, and after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, one game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39A, 1R characters are displayed (the number of rounds is displayed). The round number display may be started at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, or may be started at the same timing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a big hit game effect, a character C2 of a lord who stands by wearing boxing gloves is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a plurality of haniwa characters C3 imitating a cactus are displayed. An effect display showing a state of walking in a line from the right side to the left side of the screen is performed. Here, the number of appearing haniwa characters C3 is the same as the maximum winning number (for example, 10). The haniwa character C3 is a character that appears in a round in which the first variable winning opening 234 is opened (that is, an odd round).

  In FIG. 39 (b), one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 effectively wins, and another game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234 and still passes through the first count switch SW1. Not shown. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234, the lord character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch starts at the top (one body). In addition to hitting the haniwa character C3 of the eye, the effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the leading haniwa character C3. The effect display of “Hit” may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the haniwa character C3, or the effect display of “Hit” may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 39 (c) to (d), the leading haniwa character C3 punched by the lord character C2 is deleted, and a plurality of subsequent haniwa characters C3 are displayed on the left side of the display screen. An effect is displayed in which the player walks in a line up (ie, toward the character C2).

  A similar effect is performed for the second to eighth winnings in the first variable winning opening 234, and then, when there is a ninth winning in the first variable winning opening 234, FIG. As shown in e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the ninth prize in the first variable winning opening 234, the lord character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch is the ninth haniwa. The character C3 is hit and the effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the ninth haniwa character C3. Note that FIG. 39 (e) shows a state where the tenth game ball has been received by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 39 (f) to (g), the ninth haniwa character C3 punched by the lord character C2 is deleted, and the following one haniwa character C3 is replaced by the lord character. The effect display of the appearance of walking toward the character C2 is performed.

  Thereafter, when there is a tenth prize in the first variable winning opening 234, as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the lord character C2 feeds out a punch, the punch hits the tenth haniwa character C3, and the effect display of "Hit" to that effect is displayed superimposed on the tenth haniwa character C3. Is done. FIG. 39 (h) shows a state in which the eleventh game ball has been received by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. The first variable winning port 234 is closed when the tenth winning is achieved.

  FIG. 39 (i) shows a state in the remaining sphere detection state. In FIG. 39 (i), the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 39 (h) and has rolled in the first variable winning opening 234 is in the remaining ball detecting state during the first period. A state in which the main control unit winning counter 1 passes through the count switch SW1 and counts "11", which is the eleventh winning, is shown. Then, an over-winning is generated by the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, and in the decorative design display device 208, one haniwa character C3 newly appears, and the lord character C2 punches. When the punch hits and hits a new eleventh haniwa character C3, the eleventh haniwa character C3 blows off to the right side of the display screen and disappears outside the screen as shown in FIG. 39 (j). The effect display of the appearance is performed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 39 (i) to (j), when the remaining sphere is detected, the 1R round number display displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted. However, the round number display may be continuously displayed without deleting the round number display.

  Thereafter, at the interval between rounds, as shown in FIG. 39 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display that rejoices that the lord character C2 has won the haniwa character C3.

  Subsequently, FIG. 39 (l) shows a state where the second round is started and the second variable winning opening 234 is opened. The number of 2R rounds is displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a big hit game effect, while the lord character C2 is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen, a plurality of haniwa characters C4 imitating a cactus are displayed from the right side to the left side of the display screen. An effect display showing how to walk in line is performed. Here, the number of haniwa characters C4 appearing is the same as the maximum winning number (for example, 10). The haniwa character C4 is a character that appears in a round in which the second variable winning opening 235 is opened (that is, an even round), and has a different pattern from the haniwa character C3 shown in FIG. .

  Next, the effect performed when an over-winning prize occurs in the interval between rounds will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 40 (k1 ′) shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234 is in the closed state, the period of the remaining ball detection state has elapsed, and the interval between rounds has elapsed. FIG. 40 (k1 ′) shows that the eleventh game ball has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1. As shown in FIG. 40 (k1 ′), the contents of the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 are the same as those in FIG. 39 (k).

  In FIG. 40 (k2 ′), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 is “11” which is the eleventh winning. Is being counted. Then, when an over-winning occurs due to the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, as shown in FIGS. 40 (k2 ′) to (k3 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a large number of Is displayed in which a thousand box image C5 in which is stored falls from above the display screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect content is different between the case where an over-winning occurs during the period of the remaining ball detection state and the case where the over-winning occurs during the period between rounds. Parts or all may be the same.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of the first effect in which the over-winning effect can be started during the execution of the interval effect between rounds.

  Next, an effect performed when an over-winning occurs after the start of the next round will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 40 (11 ′) shows a state where the second round is started and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. In FIG. 40 (11 ′), the eleventh game ball was accepted by the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round, but after the second round started and the second variable winning opening 235 was opened. 2 shows that the first count switch SW1 has not yet passed. As shown in FIG. 40 (11 ′), the same display as in FIG. 39 (l) is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 40 (11 ′) shows a state in which one game ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235, but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 40 (l2-1 '), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 sets the eleventh. The winning “11” is counted, and in FIG. 40 (11 ′), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 passes through the second count switch SW2, and the main control unit winning counter 2 is set to 1 The state in which “1”, which is the number of the winning, is counted is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (l2-1 ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning occurs due to the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, and thus the upper part of the character C2 of the lord. The effect of "Hit" is displayed at the same time, and in response to the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235, the lord character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch is the leading (first) haniwa. The character C4 is hit, and an effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the leading haniwa character C4. That is, in FIG. 40 (l2-1 ′), it is shown that the effect corresponding to the over winning in the first variable winning opening 234 and the effect corresponding to the winning in the second variable winning opening 235 are simultaneously performed. Have been.

  Also, in FIG. 40 (l2-2 '), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, and the main control unit winning counter 1 sets the eleventh winning. While a certain “11” is counted, FIG. 40 (11 ′) shows that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2. Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (l2-2 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning occurs due to the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234, so that the upper part of the character C2 of the lord. , The effect of “Hit” is displayed, but the effect of punching the leading haniwa character C4 is not performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (12-3 '), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 passes through the second count switch SW2, and the main control unit winning counter 2 sets the first ball. When the winning "1" is counted, in response to this, in the decorative design display device 208, the lord character C2 pays out a punch, and the punch hits the leading (first) haniwa character C4, The effect display of “Hit” to that effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the leading haniwa character C4. As described above, the effect corresponding to the over winning in the first variable winning opening 234 and the effect corresponding to the winning in the second variable winning opening 235 may be performed before and after.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a first effect unit that can execute an over effect when a game ball enters the variable prize unit exceeding the maximum winning number. are doing.

<Sixth modification>
Next, a sixth modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The sixth modification is a modification of the rank-up bonus described above. Here, FIG. 41 is a timing chart for explaining the operation from the start to the end of the jackpot game at the 15R jackpot (substantially 8R-RUB), and FIG. 42 is the jackpot game at the 15R jackpot (substantial 8R-RUB). FIG. 43 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the big hit game at the 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) shown in FIG. In the jackpot game in the sixth modification, the first variable winning opening 234 is opened in the first to fourth rounds and the sixth to eighth rounds, and the second variable winning opening 234 is opened in the fifth and ninth to fifteenth rounds. The variable winning opening 235 is configured to open.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 between rounds in the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 41, in order from the top, the fluctuating state of the special figure 1, the operating state of the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device, the state of the large winning opening 1 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the first variable winning opening 234, the first state The operating state of the special motor-operated character (special electric part 1) related to the variable winning opening 234, the setting state of the special electric part winning detection timer (special electric part 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234, the setting of the first count switch SW1. Valid / invalid state, state of the special winning opening 2 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the second variable winning opening 235, operation state of the special electric accessory (special electric part 2) related to the second variable winning opening 235, second variable winning opening 235 shows the setting state of the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) and the valid / invalid state of the second count switch SW2.

  As shown in FIG. 41, a jackpot game with a 15R jackpot (actually 8R-RUB) is started, the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning opening 234 is performed from the first round to the seventh round, and thereafter, in the eighth round. After the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, when a maximum number of game balls are won in the first variable winning opening 234, or when an opening timer set by the set special power combination operation data elapses, timing of td01. As a result, the drive of the special winning opening 1 solenoid is stopped, and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. At this time, the above-mentioned special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234. . In the present embodiment, when the special power combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 1 is deactivated. It should be noted that the special electric combination 1 remains in the operating state after the first variable winning opening 234 is closed until the round ends, that is, until the period (δ1) set by the special electric combination operation interval timer elapses. Has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special power combination operation timer elapses and reaches the timing of td02, the eighth round ends, the special power combination 1 changes from the operating state to the non-operation state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. You. Thereafter, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of td3 comes, the ninth round is started, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Note that also in the present embodiment, the special power combination 1 and the special power combination 2 do not operate simultaneously. Since the second variable winning opening 235 is opened from the start of the round, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. The second count switch SW2 changes from an invalid state to a valid state at a timing when the special power combiner 2 is activated. Thus, when a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 has passed through the second count switch SW2, this can be effectively detected and treated as having effectively won the second variable winning opening 235. Become like In the present embodiment, since the big hit is substantially 8R, the opening time of the variable winning opening from the ninth round to the fifteenth round is extremely short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the opening time is short. The winning of game balls in the two variable winning openings 235 can hardly be expected. In this embodiment, even after the second variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses. When the two variable winning opening 235 is in the open state, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the previous round may pass through the first count switch SW1 and be detected as a winning. Note that the second count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is first opened after the round starts.

  After that, when the game ball of the maximum winning number is won in the second variable winning opening 235 or the opening timer set by the set special power combination operation data elapses, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is driven at the timing of t04. It stops and the second variable winning opening 235 is closed. Since the ninth round is a short opening round, the second variable winning opening 235 does not become substantially closed when a maximum number of game balls are won, and the second variable winning opening 235 does not reach the second opening after the opening timer elapses. The variable winning opening 235 is closed. At this time, the above-described special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235. . In the present embodiment, the time set by the special power combination operation interval timer is a round in which the variable winning opening is a long opening (for example, the eighth round described above) when the variable winning opening is in a short opening round. The time is shorter than the set time (for example, 0.2 seconds), but may be longer than the time set in the variable winning opening in the long opening round.

  At time td05 after the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses, the ninth round ends, the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operation state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. You. In the present embodiment, the time set by the special power combination operation delay timer is a round in which the variable winning opening is a long opening (for example, the eighth round described above) when the variable winning opening is in a short opening round. The time is shorter than the set time (for example, 0.3 second), but may be longer than the time set in the variable winning opening in the long opening round. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of td06 comes, the tenth round is started, and the special power combination 2 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. At this time, since the second count switch SW2 is configured to be enabled at the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated, it is not necessary to count the time set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer. , The special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer is cleared and is not set. In the present embodiment, even after the ninth round ends and the tenth round starts, the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer has not elapsed, and the first count switch SW1 has been turned on for two or more rounds. It will be valid.

  Thereafter, the above operation is repeatedly performed until the fifteenth round is completed (td06 to td16).

  In this way, the big hit game is performed, and at the timing of td16, the big hit end effect starts, and the big hit end effect is performed until the period (# 1) set by the hit end display timer elapses.

  When the big hit end effect ends and the timing of td17 is reached, the big hit game ends (the continuous operation device and the condition device change from the operating state to the non-operating state), and thereafter, the special drawing 1 of FIG. Symbol change is started. In the present embodiment, the period set by the special power role 2 winning detection timer has not elapsed even after the big hit end effect ends and the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts, and the big hit game ends and the symbol change Is started, the second count switch SW2 is enabled.

  After that, when the period set by the special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 becomes invalid at the timing of td19.

  Next, a specific effect example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 42 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general figure hold. Lamp 216 is shown. FIG. 42 also shows a first variable winning opening 234 as a first attacker and a second variable winning opening 235 as a second attacker, and the first variable winning opening 234 corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. Corresponding to the number of balls entering the variable winning opening 234, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub-control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning opening 235, the number of balls entering the second variable winning opening 235, the main control. The section winning counter 2 and the sub-control section winning counter 2 are shown. The main control unit prize counter 1 and the main control unit prize counter 2 store the number of prizes to the first variable prize port 234 and the second variable prize port 235 in one round stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. It is a counter shown. The sub control unit prize counter 1 and the sub control unit prize counter 2 are counters indicating the number of prizes to the first variable prize port 234 and the second variable prize port 235 in one round stored in the RAM 308 of the sub control unit 400. It is. The sub control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 2 are counted when a special winning opening winning command is received from the main control unit 300. Further, in the present embodiment, the speaker 120 is also shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 42 (a), a character image of “Rank Up Bonus” is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here) as a big hit game start effect. Note that the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the fourth symbol display area 284 have disappeared.

  In FIG. 42 (b), the first round, which is the first round of the 15 round big hit (substantially 8 round big hit) game, has been started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 42 (b) is opened, and the first variable winning opening 234 is in an open state. In addition, a winning total number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (b). In the rank-up bonus in this production example, at least at the start of the jackpot game, it is difficult for the player to specify whether the expected round of the ball will continue up to four, eight, or fifteen rounds. In FIG. 42 (b), in FIG. 42 (b), the total number of obtainable prize balls is assumed to be at least 4 rounds, and it is assumed that a round in which a ball can be expected to be continued continues. "600 pt" corresponding to the number of prize balls (15) x the maximum winning number (10) in one round x the number of rounds (4 rounds) is displayed. FIG. 42 (b) shows a state where one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 has been effectively won, and the display “15” corresponding to the number of acquired award balls (15) is decorated. This is shown by the winning total number display of the symbol display device 208. Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (b), a total of 20 prize icons indicating the number of prizes are arranged in an upper row and 10 in a lower row. Each time two gaming balls win in the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the winning icon changes from a non-winning display mode to a winning display mode one by one from top left to right. It has become. In other words, these 20 icons indicate the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning openings 234 and 235 in the first to fourth rounds.

  FIG. 42C shows a state where the fourth round is being executed. As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 is open, and the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state. In FIG. 42 (b), nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234, and the first count switch SW1 is still in operation. Are not passed. Then, in FIG. 42 (b), the number of winnings in the variable winning opening from the start of the big hit game is 39, so the number of winning prize balls is 39 × 15 = 585. For this reason, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display “585” corresponding to the number of 585 prize balls is displayed as the total number of winning prizes. In addition, the winning icons are all changed to the winning display, except for the icon displayed at the bottom of the rightmost column. Eleven winning icons out of the icons in which the display mode has changed have a display mode of a symbol of a thousand boxes, and the remaining eight winning icons have a default (black circle) display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that as the number of the winning icons changed to the display mode of the symbol of a thousand boxes as the display mode of the completed prize, the higher the degree of expectation that the round in which the ball can be expected to continue even after the fourth round is higher. it can. In other words, in the case of a 15R big hit (substantially 8R-RUB) or a 15R big hit (15R-RUB), it is easy to change to a display mode of a symbol of a thousand boxes. On the other hand, in the case of a 15R jackpot (substantially 4R-RUB), the default display mode is easily changed.

  In FIG. 42 (d), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes "10" and the winning number of the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number, so the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The winning opening 234 is in a closed state. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display “600” corresponding to the number of 600 winning balls is displayed as the total winning number display. The winning icon displayed at the bottom of the rightmost column has changed from the non-winning display mode to the 1000-box symbol display mode. In this effect example, even if an over-winning prize occurs, the display exceeding "600" is not performed, but it may be displayed by adding the over-winning number.

  FIG. 42E shows a state where the fifth round is being executed. When the fifth round is started, the second variable winning opening 235 makes a short opening (for example, opening for 0.2 seconds) a plurality of times (for example, ten times). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, along with a button image imitating the effect button 136, a character "Continuation?" Is displayed (continuation availability display). Also, a remaining time display bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. In a big hit game with a 15R big hit (substantially 4R-RUB), an operation of short-opening the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 only once is performed in the fifth to fifteenth rounds, respectively.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which, in the fifth round, after the short opening is performed 10 times by the second variable winning opening 235, the long opening (for example, opening for 17 seconds) is performed. I have. That is, the second variable winning opening 235 is open, and the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained in the open state. Further, in this example of the effect, since the jackpot game is a 15R jackpot (actually 8R-RUB), the decorative symbol display device 208 informs that a round in which a ball can be expected will continue after the fifth round. Character display (continuous display) is performed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the current jackpot is either the 15R jackpot (15R-RUB) or the 15R jackpot (substantially 8R-RUB). This continuation display is executed at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated or at the timing when the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136 has elapsed. Since the timing at which the second variable winning opening 235 is long opened is predetermined, the timing of the operation of the effect button 136 is much earlier than the timing of the elapse of the reception period of the operation of the effect button 136. In this case, a state is reached in which the continuous display shown in FIG. 43F is displayed until the opening of the second variable winning opening 235 starts. In the big hit game with the 15R big hit (substantially 4R-RUB), the big hit game is ended after a character display of “sorry. Further, when an over-winning occurs while the above-described continuation display or continuation availability display is being performed, an over-winning sound may be output from the speaker 120 or may not be output.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows a state after the end of the continuous display in the fifth round. In FIG. 43 (g), the display contents of the winning total number display are changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (g), it is possible for the player to recognize that the game lasts up to at least 8 rounds, so that the total number of prize balls that can be obtained continues at least up to 8 rounds in which balls can be expected. "1200 pt" corresponding to 1200 pieces (the number of prize balls for winning one game ball in the variable winning opening (15 pieces) x the maximum number of prizes (10 pieces) in one round x the number of rounds (8 rounds)) Is displayed. Also, the winning icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (g) have been changed from the winning-completed display mode to the non-winning display mode. This makes it possible to indicate the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning openings 234 and 235 in the fifth to eighth rounds. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42 (e), during the period in which the short opening is performed a plurality of times in the fifth round, it is not generally expected that the game ball will be awarded to the second variable winning opening 235. When a game ball wins in the second variable winning opening 235 during this period, “615/1200 pt” may be displayed from the beginning in the display of the acquired number of winning balls in FIG. / 1200 pt ". Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (d), an over-prize has already been generated for one ball, and the over-prize is displayed in a manner not to be included in the number of acquired award balls (for example, displayed as “600/600 pt”). ), Even if a display in which the total number of obtainable prize balls increases (for example, a display changing from “600 pt” to “1200 pt”) is performed, the number of obtained prize balls is not included without including the over-prize. It may be displayed (for example, “600/1200 pt”), or the number of acquired prize balls including the over-winning prize may be displayed (for example, “615/1200 pt”). . Alternatively, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (d), if the already-winned portion is included in the number of acquired prize balls, for example, “615 / 600pt”, the timing shown in FIG. , "615/1200 pt", or "600/1200 pt" without over-winning.

  In FIG. 43 (h), during execution of the eighth round, the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10”, and the winning number of the first variable winning opening 234 becomes the maximum winning number. 234 is shown closed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display “1200” corresponding to the number of 1200 winning balls is displayed as the total winning number display. Also, the winning icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 have all changed to the winning display mode, and the three winning icons of the icons whose display modes have changed are the display modes of the symbols of the thousand boxes. The remaining 17 winning icons have a default (black circle) display mode. In other words, the player may recognize that the degree of expectation that the round in which a ball can be expected to continue to be played continues after the ninth round is low. In FIG. 43 (h), the main control is such that the second variable winning opening 235 is opened in the fifth round and ten game balls are won, and thereafter, the second variable winning opening 235 is not opened. Neither the section winning counter 2 nor the sub-control section winning counter 2 is cleared and remains "10". Also, in FIG. 43 (h), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234 but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234. It is shown moving. This game ball h is an eleventh prize game ball to the first variable prize port 234, and can be said to be a prize ball that exceeds the maximum number of prizes (wins over).

  When the eighth round is completed and the inter-round interval is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the display shown in FIG. 42 (e) described above, and then, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, indicating that the expected round has ended in the eighth round. This may allow the player to recognize that the rank-up bonus is substantially 8R. After that, the operation of short-opening the second variable winning opening 235 only once is performed in the ninth to fifteenth rounds, respectively. Note that FIG. 43 (i) shows that the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 in the eighth round has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. I have. In the case where the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 during the interval between rounds and an over-winning occurs, the over-winning is output during the interval between the rounds.

  FIG. 44 (j) shows a state in which a big hit end effect is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (j), since the rank-up bonus was substantially 8R, the character display of “1200 pt GET probable change intrusion” indicating that the number of acquired prize balls was 1200 is displayed. Has been done. On the other hand, FIG. 42 (j) shows a state in which the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 in FIG. 42 (i) has passed the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count the eleventh winning "11". Then, an eleventh prize in the first variable prize port 234 generates an over prize, and as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the speaker 120 outputs an over prize sound notifying the fact. As described above, regardless of whether the variable winning opening is in the open state or the closed state, the over-winning sound is output to the variable winning opening during the period in which the special power combination 1 winning detection timer is set. Output when there is a game ball. In the present embodiment, the display of the number of acquired prize balls does not include the over-prize, but the over-prize may be included. Also, in this effect example, for example, during the execution of the big hit end effect, during the execution of the symbol variation display, during the execution of the effect display in a standby state where the symbol variation is not performed and there is no hold, such as a specific effect of If it is being executed, the over-prize effect may not be executed. Further, although data for outputting an over-winning sound is set, for example, the data may be configured to be overwritten by data for outputting another effect sound.

  In the above description, the effect performed when the over winning in the first variable winning opening 234 occurs has been described. However, the same effect is executed when the over winning in the second variable winning opening 235 occurs. It goes without saying that it is possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the over winning effect is configured to be executable as long as the winning detection timer (special electric part 1 winning detection timer, special electric part 2 winning detection timer) is set. Even if the detection timer is set, the over-winning prize effect may not be executed if the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, after the first sub-control unit 400 receives a hit end command or after the hit end display timer is set in the main control unit 300, the over-winning effect is not executed even if the winning detection timer is set. You may do so. Also, for example, after the big hit game ends and the first sub-control unit 400 receives a change waiting command, or after the win end display timer times out in the main control unit 300, the winning detection timer is set. However, the over winning effect may not be executed. Further, after the first sub-control unit 400 receives the first fluctuation start command after the big hit game ends, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if the winning detection timer is set.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The following description focuses on the differences from the above-described embodiments.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating the front of the attacker unit 2340, and FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating the attacker unit 2340 viewed from the rear.

  The attacker unit 2340 includes a first variable winning opening 234a as an example of the first variable winning means and a second variable winning opening 235a as an example of the second variable winning means, and the first variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. Instead of the winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, for example, the winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are attached to the lower right of the game area 124 in the game board 200.

  The attacker unit 2340 has, for example, a flat shape and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted with a predetermined interval on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. .

  The mounting base 2340a is provided with a rectangular opening substantially at the center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by the driving of a solenoid SOL1 mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. The solenoid SOL1 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. On the back side of the mounting base 2340a, there is formed a winning passage for discharging the game ball entering the first variable winning opening 234a downward. A count switch SW1 is provided.

  A second variable winning opening 235a described later is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b. Hereinafter, the configuration of the second variable winning opening 235a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). FIG. 46 is a view for explaining the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a, and FIG. 46 (a) is a view showing that the V shutter 2352a as an example of the variable entering means is in a closed state. FIG. 46B shows that the V shutter 2352a is in the open state. In FIG. 46A and FIG. 46B, the decorative member 2340b is shown transparently in order to easily explain the internal structure of the second variable winning opening 235a.

  As shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e standing upright from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling area SP1 and a second rolling area SP2 in which a game ball can roll are formed by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the rolling area SP1 is closed by a front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The first rolling region SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open portion. The shutter member 2351a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 45). The solenoid SOL2 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state in which the shutter member 2351a has advanced forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the first rolling region SP1 is closed, and the first ball of the game ball is closed. When the entry into the rolling area SP1 is blocked and the vehicle is retracted backward (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened, and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Ingress is allowed.

  At a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2, a second count switch SW2 for detecting the passage of a game ball is disposed. When the entered game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the second count switch SW2. The second count switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the second count switch SW2, it detects the winning in the second variable winning opening 235a and pays out the winning ball based on the winning. To perform the processing.

  The game ball that has passed through the second count switch SW2 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured so that a V path 2340g and a general path 2340h are arranged side by side in the left and right direction, and the received game balls are guided to one of the paths and discharged downward. . A V passage switch SW3 is provided in the V passage 2340g, and a game ball guided to the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through the V passage switch SW3. As described above, it can be said that the V passage 2340g is an area provided at a position at which a game ball that has entered at least the second variable winning opening 235a can enter. The V passing switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the V passage switch SW3, it can be determined that the game ball has passed the V passage 2340g. Further, a plate-shaped V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover above the V passage 2340g. The V shutter 23521a is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid SOL3 (see FIG. 45). The solenoid SOL3 is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the V shutter 2352a is in a state of protruding forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the game ball is transferred to the V passage 2340g. Is stopped, and the game ball that has entered the second rolling area SP2 rolls on the upper surface of the V shutter 2352a and is guided to the general passage 2340h. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46B, when the V shutter 2352a is retracted rearward (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the entry of the game ball into the V passage 2340g is permitted. The game ball that has entered the second rolling area SP2 is guided to the V path 2340g. In the following description, the solenoid SOL3 may be referred to as a positive-variable-operation-area solenoid. A discharge ball detection switch SW4 is provided in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW4. The ejection ball detection switch SW4 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW4, it detects that the game ball has passed the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable of the game ball is determined by the number of game balls passed by the second count switch SW2 and the number of passes of the V pass switch SW3 and the discharge ball detection switch SW4. By monitoring in / out to the winning opening 235a, it may be possible to monitor that a game ball is illegally passed through the V passage 2340g. Specifically, the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch SW2 of the second variable winning opening 235a is counted as the number (IN number) accepted by the second variable winning opening 235a and stored in the RAM 308. On the other hand, the total number of game balls detected by each of the V passage switch SW3 and the discharge ball detection switch SW4 is counted as the number (OUT number) discharged from the second variable winning opening 235a and stored in the RAM 308. . For the IN number and the OUT number, for example, in the above-described special electric role remaining ball detection processing, a process of checking whether the IN number and the OUT number match is executed. Is determined to be in the state of excessive winning, and when IN number <OUT number, it is possible to determine the winning error by determining that the state is excessive discharging. An illegal act includes, for example, an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a rule (a so-called deca ball).

  Further, in the present embodiment, due to the above-described configuration, only the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a can enter the V passage 2340g, and the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a has the V passage. It is configured to be unable to enter 2340 g.

  In the present embodiment, for example, on condition that a game ball has passed through the V passing switch SW3 in the big hit game, the game shifts to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probable change state) after the big hit game ends, and in the big hit game When the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch SW3, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the state shifts to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, for example, when a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the V-pass switch SW3 during the period from the start to the end of the small hit game (during the small hit game), the first variable A big hit game in which the winning opening 234a is opened and closed in a predetermined special electricity combination operation pattern may be performed.

  Next, an example of the operation timing of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a between rounds in the jackpot game executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a timing chart illustrating the operation timing of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit. Here, the 15R special jackpot means that it is easy to enter the second variable winning opening 235a, and it is expected that the game ball will pass through the V pass switch SW3. It is a jackpot that can be expected to shift.

  In FIG. 47, in order from the top, the operating state of the accessory continuous operating device and the condition device, the state of the large winning opening 1 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the first variable winning opening 234a, and the special state related to the first variable winning opening 234a. The operating state of the electric accessory (special electric part 1), the setting state of the special electric part winning detection timer (special electric part 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234a, the valid / invalid state of the first count switch SW1, the second state The state of the special winning opening 2 solenoid that drives the opening and closing of the variable winning opening 235a, the operation state of the special electric role (special electric part 2) related to the second variable winning opening 235, and the special electric winning detection for the second variable winning opening 235a. The setting state of the timer (special electric winning combination 2 winning detection timer), the valid / invalid state of the second count switch SW2, the state of the positive variable operation area solenoid SOL3 that drives the opening and closing of the V shutter 2352a, the V Switch Enable / disable state of (probability variation operating range) SW3, the presence or absence of detection of passage of the game ball into the probability variation operating range is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 47, after the jackpot game of the 15R special jackpot has been started, at the timing of tc01, a predetermined first round (for example, the twelfth round) is started, and the special electric utility 1 is operated from the inactive state. State. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is opened from the start of the round, the big winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234a is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 1 is activated. Thus, when a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has passed through the first count switch SW1, this can be effectively detected and treated as having effectively won the first variable winning opening 234a. Become like

  After that, when the game balls having the maximum number of winnings described above are awarded to the first variable winning opening 234a, or when the opening timer set by the set special power combination operation data elapses, the large winning opening 1 solenoid is activated at time tc02. The driving is stopped and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. At this time, the above-described special power combination operation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 1 winning detection timer) related to the first variable winning opening 234a. . In the present embodiment, when the special power combination 1 winning detection timer is set, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 1 is deactivated. Note that the special electric combination 1 remains in the operating state after the first variable winning opening 234a is closed until the round ends, that is, until a period (δ1) set by the special electric combination operation interval timer elapses. Has become.

  When the period (δ1) set by the special power role activation interval timer elapses and the timing of tc03 comes, the first round ends, the special power role 1 changes from the active state to the non-active state, and the special power role activation delay timer is set. Is done. Thereafter, when the period (ε1) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tc04 comes, the second round (for example, the 13th round) following the first round is started, and the special power combination 2 is not started. The state changes from the operating state to the operating state. In the present embodiment, the special power combination 1 and the special power combination 2 do not operate at the same time. Then, since the second variable winning opening 235a is opened from the start of the round, the big winning opening 2 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened. The second count switch SW2 changes from an invalid state to a valid state at a timing when the special power combiner 2 is activated. Thus, when a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a has passed through the second count switch SW2, this can be effectively detected and treated as having effectively won the second variable winning opening 235a. Become like In the present embodiment, even after the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state until the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses. When the two variable winning openings 235a are in the open state, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the previous round may pass through the first count switch SW1 and be detected as winning. Note that the second count switch SW2 may be changed from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235a is first opened after the round starts. At the timing when the special power combination 2 is activated, the positive-variable operation area solenoid SOL3 is driven and the V shutter 2352a is opened. The V shutter 2352a is kept open until a first V release time (for example, 1 second) elapses. In addition, the probable change operation region also changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the V shutter 2352a is opened. As a result, when passing through the V passage switch (probable change operation area) SW3, this is effectively detected, and it is possible to treat the game ball as having passed the probable change operation area effectively. At this time, a first V passage effective time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is set so that a game ball passed while the V shutter 2352a is in the open state can be reliably detected as an effective one. That is, the first V passage effective time is set to a time longer than the first V open time. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the game ball passes through the probable change operation area at a timing after the timing of tc04.

  After that, when the period set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer elapses, the first count switch SW1 becomes invalid at the timing of tc05. Further, at the timing of tc05 after the elapse of the above-described first V opening time, the drive of the positive-variation operation area SOL3 is stopped, and the V shutter 2352a is closed. The V shutter 2352a is kept closed, for example, until a first V closing time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. Note that the timing at which the first count switch SW1 becomes invalid and the timing at which the drive of the positive-variation operation area SOL3 stops and the V shutter 2352a closes may be the same timing or may be different timings. You may.

  After that, when the first V passage effective time elapses, the probable change operation area changes from the valid state to the invalid state. As a result, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the game ball from being illegally passed through the certain variation operation area.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tc07 after the elapse of the first V closing time, the positive-variable operation area solenoid SOL3 is driven again, and the V shutter 2352a changes from the closed state to the open state. The V shutter 2352a is kept open, for example, until a maximum of a second V release time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses. In addition, the probable change operation region also changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the V shutter 2352a is opened. The valid state is maintained in the valid state until, for example, a second V passage valid time (for example, 20.5 seconds) elapses at the maximum.

  After that, when the game balls with the maximum number of winnings described above enter the second variable winning opening 235 or when the opening timer set by the set special power combination operation data elapses, the large winning opening 2 solenoid is activated at timing tc08. The driving is stopped and the second variable winning opening 235a is closed. At this time, the special power combination activation interval timer is set, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the special power combination winning detection timer (special power combination 2 winning detection timer) related to the second variable winning opening 235a. In the present embodiment, when the special power combination 2 winning detection timer is set, the second count switch SW2 is maintained in an effective state even after the special power combination 2 is deactivated. It should be noted that, after the second variable winning opening 235a is closed, the special power combination 2 remains in the operating state until the round ends, that is, until the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses. Has become. Further, in the present embodiment, a third V release time (for example, 2.5 seconds) is newly set at the timing tc08 even if the second V release time has not elapsed, and this third V release time is set. The open state of V shutter 2352a is maintained until the V open time elapses. Further, at the timing of tc08, even if the second V-pass effective time has not elapsed, a third V-pass effective time (for example, 3.5 seconds) is newly set, and this third V-pass effective time is set. Until time elapses, the probable operating area remains valid.

  When the period (δ2) set by the special power combination operation interval timer elapses and reaches the timing of tc09, the second round ends, the special power combination 2 changes from the operating state to the non-operation state, and the special power combination operation delay timer is set. Is done. Thereafter, when the period (ε2) set by the special power combination operation delay timer elapses and the timing of tc10 comes, the third round is started, and the special power combination 1 is changed from the non-operation state to the operation state. Since the first variable winning opening 234a is opened from the start of the third round, the big winning opening 1 solenoid is also driven at this time, and the first variable winning opening 234a is opened. Further, the first count switch SW1 changes from the invalid state to the valid state at the timing when the special power combination 1 is activated. In the present embodiment, even after the first variable winning opening 234a is in the open state, the second count switch SW2 is in the valid state until the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses. When the one variable winning opening 234a is in the open state, a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the previous round may pass through the second count switch SW2 and be detected as winning.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tc11 after the elapse of the third V opening time, the drive of the positive-variable operation area solenoid SOL3 is stopped, and the V shutter 2352a changes from the open state to the closed state. After that, when the period set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer elapses, the second count switch SW2 is disabled at the timing of tc12. Then, after that, when the third V passage effective time elapses and reaches the timing of tc13, the positive-variable operation area changes from the valid state to the invalid state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the V shutter 2352a during the big hit game may be changed according to the type of the big hit symbol. Further, the opening pattern of V shutter 2352a may be changed depending on the round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a are kept open from the start to the end of the round. In the (round), the open state is maintained in the first half of the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) of the variable winning opening from the start of the round, and the short opening is repeated in the second half (for example, 0. Opening for 2 seconds and closing for 1 second may be repeated).

  Subsequently, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the present embodiment, rounds 1 to 14 are rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened, and round 15 is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened. The round to be opened and the round to be opened by the second variable winning opening 235a can be arbitrarily set. This production example shows a specific production example in the case of a 15R special jackpot.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (a), “decorative 3-decorative 4-decorative 1”, which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, any one of the first special figure 1 hold display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is shown. Are also displayed in the default display mode.

  Note that FIG. 48 also shows a first special figure display device 212 and a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and a second special figure display device 214 and a special figure 2 hold lamp 220. In FIG. 48 (a), since there are four suspension numbers of the variable display of the special figure 1, four lamps of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 are turned on.

  In addition, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the special pattern I, which is a lost pattern, and the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the special figure f, which is a lost pattern. I have. In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 variably displayed in accordance with the display status of the first special symbol display device 212, and a display status of the second special symbol display device 214 And the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 which are variably displayed corresponding to. In FIG. 48 (a), the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 corresponds to the “special symbol I” stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, for example, the white circle mark which is a lost symbol stops. It is displayed in the displayed state. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 corresponds to the “special figure f” stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, for example, in a state where a white square mark which is a lost pattern is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. In addition, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner such that the stopped symbol can be recognized in FIGS. However, actually, the stopped and displayed symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable by the player.

  In FIG. 48 (b), the reservation (first reservation) of the special figure 1 is consumed, and only the first special figure 1 reservation display h11 to the third special figure 1 reservation display h13 are displayed. Also, the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 48B has started the symbol variation display, and the decoration symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decoration symbol. Note that various effects are possible in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the effect performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol is an example of the symbol variable effect. The symbol variation effect can be executed not only by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 but also by audio output from the speaker 120, blinking of various lamps 418, and the like. In addition, the design change effect may include a pre-reading notice effect, a notice effect in the change, or the like. During the symbol change display, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the blinking in which all seven segments are turned on, momentarily turned off, and all seven segments are turned on again. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also displayed in a variable manner, for example, in such a manner that the color shown in the circle changes to a plurality of types in correspondence with the symbol variable display of the first special figure display device 212.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first stop and a second stop are performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. And a reach state is formed. At this time, an effect for notifying that the vehicle has reached the reach state may be performed. The effect of notifying that such a reach state has been reached is an example of a reach effect, and may also be an example of a symbol variation effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs display that evolves into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, are displayed small in the upper left corner. Such a super-reach effect is an example of a super-reach effect, and can also be an example of a symbol variation effect.

  After that, when the super reach is finished, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a third stop, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and each decoration is displayed. The symbol starts to fluctuate. That is, the temporary stop display is performed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), the 15R special big hit symbol “special figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the first special figure 1 A black circle symbol corresponding to the “special figure A” stopped and displayed on the special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the decoration symbol display device 208, and one variation game of the special figure is completed.

  When the “special figure A” is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the big hit game is started, and the big symbol start effect as shown in FIG. At this time, a display for instructing right-handing is also performed.

  After that, when the big hit start effect ends and the first round is started, as shown in FIG. 48 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive villas is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This big hit game is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (normal game state). "First time" is displayed. Note that the control state of the main control unit 300 is shown in the lower center part of FIG. 48 (h), and indicates that the control state is the first round of the big hit game.

  FIG. 48 (i) shows the effect contents in the fourth round. As shown in FIG. 48 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the fifteenth round, it is determined whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable winning opening 235a will be open for a long time and easily pass V. A suggested promotion effect is performed, and as a result, the effect contents that succeeded in the promotion effect are executed. That is, it is notified that the game is a big hit game in which the certain change transition condition is easily satisfied. As shown in FIG. 48 (i), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the fourth round. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening is shown. In FIG. 48 (i), three gaming balls have won the first variable winning opening 234a. It has been shown.

  After that, the big hit game progresses, and at the 14th round, an effect as shown in FIG. 48 (j) is executed. In other words, as shown in FIG. 48 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the big hit game and makes the V passing in the next round, that is, the 15th round. "Aim for V at next R" is displayed. As a result, there is a case where the player can reliably perform the V passage. As shown in FIG. 48 (j), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the 14th round. FIG. 48 (j) shows that seven game balls have won the first variable winning opening 234a.

  Thereafter, in the fifteenth round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the V shutter 2352a is opened to allow easy passage of V. In the decorative symbol display device 208, FIG. As shown in the figure, the indication of the fifteenth round is displayed, and the indication "Aim for V" is displayed to promote the passage of V. As shown in FIG. 48 (k), the main control unit 300 is in the control state of the fifteenth round. Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (k), the number of winning of the game balls to the second variable winning opening 235a is 0.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (l), when there is a passing (V passing) of the game ball to the certain variable operation area in the second variable winning opening 235a, as shown in FIG. The device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability change acquisition has been confirmed. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change acquisition has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V passing has occurred. FIG. 48 (m) shows that 11 game balls have won the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (m), an over winning has occurred.

  Thereafter, when the fifteenth round is completed, the end effect of the big hit game is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 48 (n). In the jackpot game described above, since the V has passed in the fifteenth round, the certain change transition condition has been satisfied. Therefore, while the symbol change display is performed 150 times after the end of the big hit game, the certain change state (the special figure high probability normal figure) is performed. (High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, a display of “entering Yoshimune mode” indicating that the game is to be shifted to the probable change state (progress during probable change) is performed.

  When the big hit game is completed as described above, the state is shifted to the probable change state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), and as shown in FIG. Of the "Yoshimune mode" is performed, and a "Big hit when an enemy is defeated" is displayed, which explains the contents of the effect display that becomes a big hit. At this time, there was no suspension of the variable display of the special figure 2 and three suspensions of the variable display of the special figure 1. Therefore, the reservation (the first reservation) of the special figure 1 was consumed, and the first special figure display device was used. At the same time as the symbol fluctuation display 212 is started, the decoration symbol display device 208 also starts the decoration symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the decorative symbol is variably displayed at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining number of symbol variable displays capable of executing the probable change state is displayed, and is decremented by one each time the symbol variable display is started. Further, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure 2 reserved display h21, a second special figure 2 reserved display h22, a third special figure 2 reserved display h23, and a fourth special figure 2 reserved display. Although h24 is displayed, since there is no suspension of the variable display of the special figure 2, the display indicating that all are blank is made. Further, the display of the number of consecutive villas and the display for instructing right-handing, which are displayed in the big hit game, are also continuously performed.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol variation display of the first special figure display device 212, if at least four game balls are won in the special figure 2 starting port 232, the variation display of the four special figures 2 is suspended. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (p), all four holding lamps in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned on. At the same time, the hold display in the default display mode is performed in the first special figure 2 hold display h21 to the fourth special figure 2 hold display h24.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the state of the big hit game in the 15R special big hit in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 49 shows the decorative symbol display device 208, a first variable winning opening 234a that is a first attacker, and a second variable winning opening 235a that is a second attacker, and corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234a. The number of balls entered into the first variable winning opening 234a, the main control unit winning counter 1, the sub-control unit winning counter 1, and the second variable winning opening 235 corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235a. The numbers, the main control unit winning counter 2 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are shown. FIG. 49 also shows a speaker 120. The illustration of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold lamp 216 is omitted. ing.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows that the 14th round in the jackpot game with the 15R special jackpot is being executed. As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the 14th round of the jackpot game, and prompts the player to make the V pass in the next round, ie, the 15th round. The message "Aim for V at next R" is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive villas is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This big hit game is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (normal game state). "First time" is displayed. In the fourth special symbol t1 of the special figure 1, a black circle symbol corresponding to the "special figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 49 (a), seven game balls to the first variable winning opening 234a are effectively won, and one game ball is received by the first variable winning opening 234a, and the first count switch SW1 is still in operation. Are not passed. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning of the game balls to the variable winning opening (display of the winning number) is shown. In FIG. 49 (a), seven games to the first variable winning opening 234a are shown. “7” is displayed corresponding to the winning of the ball.

  In FIG. 49 (b), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10” and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a becomes the maximum winning number, so the first variable winning opening 234a is closed and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. The variable winning opening 234a is in a closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays the characters 14R. That is, FIG. 49B shows that the above-described remaining sphere detection state is set. Further, since the value of the sub control unit winning counter 1 is “10”, the winning number display displayed on the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “10”. In FIG. 49B, one game ball (remaining ball) that has been received by the first variable winning opening 234a but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 rolls in the first variable winning opening 234a. Is shown. This game ball is an eleventh prize game ball to the first variable prize port 234a, and can be said to be a prize ball that exceeds the maximum number of prizes (wins over).

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the remaining sphere detection state ends and the interval between rounds comes, the character display of 14R displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. Good. In FIG. 49 (c), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a in FIG. 49 (b) has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. It is shown.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 49D, the fifteenth round is started. The second variable winning opening 235a shown in FIG. 49D is opened, and the second variable winning opening 235a is in an open state. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs character display of 15R indicating that it is the 15th round, and also calls “V aiming” to promote passing V. The display is also performed. Also, FIG. 49D shows that the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1, and is still rolling. . As described above, even in the present embodiment, even after the round (the fifteenth round) is started, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the previous round (the 14th round) still has a prize. May not be in the state. Note that FIG. 49D shows a state where one game ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235a, but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), after the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (d) passes through the second count switch SW2, the V passing switch SW3 is turned off. After passing, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability change acquisition has been confirmed. On the other hand, FIG. 49 (f) shows a state in which the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a in FIG. 49 (d) has passed the first count switch SW1. At this time, since the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer is set and the passing of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is effectively handled, it is treated as an effective winning to the first variable winning opening 234a, The main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub control unit winning counter 1 both count the eleventh winning "11". Then, an over winning is generated by the eleventh winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, and as shown in FIG. 49 (f), an over winning sound notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120. That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 49 (f), an effect performed by passing a game ball to the probable change operation area (a V-passing effect) and an effect performed by over-winning the first variable winning opening 234a (over-winning). Direction) is superimposed. Note that, depending on the timing of the passing of the game ball to the certain variation operation area and the timing of occurrence of an over-winning prize, an over-winning effect may be performed after the V-passing effect is performed, or an over-winning effect may be performed. After that, the V-pass effect may be performed, or the V-pass effect and the over-winning effect may be started at the same time. Further, when an over-winning occurs in the first variable winning opening 234a during the execution of the V-pass effect, the over-winning effect may not be performed. It goes without saying that an over-winning effect may be executed when an over-winning occurs for the second variable winning opening 235a.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of an over-winning prize production, and FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a state in a case where there is a power interruption and power recovery in the big hit game in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 50 (a-1) shows a state where the eighth round of the big hit game is being executed, and a state where the first variable winning opening 234 is open. Also, at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (a-1), an 8R character display (round number display) is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a haniwa character C1 appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the maximum winning number for each round and the number of gaming balls that have won the first variable winning opening 234 since the start of the round is displayed. ing. In the effect example shown in FIG. 50, the speaker 120 is also shown. In FIG. 50 (a-1), in the eighth round, nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and two game balls (tenth and eleventh) are in the first round. A state is shown in which the variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes 10 and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 reaches the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet passed the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, during the period of the remaining ball detection state or the interval between rounds, when the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, an over-winning occurs. As shown at 50 (a-2), an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not count and display the number of gaming balls for which the number of winnings exceeds the winning number display, and displays the number of gaming balls that have won the first variable winning opening 234 since the start of the round. Is displayed as "10/10".

  FIG. 50 (b-1) shows a state where the eighth round of the big hit game is being executed, and a state where the first variable winning opening 234 is open. In addition, at the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a haniwa character C1 appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize total number display capable of specifying the number of prize balls obtained by prize winning in the variable prize hole from the start of the big hit game to the present is displayed. That is, in FIG. 50 (b-1), since 79 game balls have won the first variable winning opening 234 from the start of the big hit game to the present, the first variable winning opening in this effect example. Since the number of prize balls for the prize to 234 is 15 and the maximum number of prizes in one round is 10, the number of prize balls acquired is 1185, and "1185 pt" indicating that is displayed as the total number of prizes displayed. I have. Then, in FIG. 50 (b-1), in the eighth round, nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and two game balls (the tenth ball and the eleventh ball) are further provided. Is received by the first variable winning opening 234 and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes 10 and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 reaches the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet passed the first count switch SW1. After that, when the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. The winning sound is output. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not count and display the number of game balls corresponding to the over-prize in the winning total display, but obtains by winning the first variable winning opening 234 after the big hit game has started. With the number of awarded balls set to 1200, "1200 pt" indicating that is displayed as the total number of winnings.

  FIG. 50 (c-1) shows a state where the eighth round of the big hit game is being executed, and a state where the first variable winning opening 234 is open. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c-1), an 8R character display (round number display) is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a haniwa character C1 appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect display including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning number display indicating the maximum winning number for each round and the number of gaming balls that have won the first variable winning opening 234 since the start of the round is displayed. ing. In FIG. 50 (c-1), in the eighth round, nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and two game balls (the tenth and eleventh) are in the first round. A state is shown in which the variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes 10 and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 reaches the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet passed the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (c-2), an interval between rounds is reached, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an interval display between rounds. At this time, the winning number display is deleted. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an example of a second effect unit that starts an inter-round interval effect in place of the winning effect (display of the number of winnings) when the first round (eighth round) is completed. are doing. Further, in this effect example, in the interval between rounds, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1, and an over-winning occurs. In response, an over-winning sound is output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the speaker 120 functions as an example of the first effect unit that can start the over-winning effect during the execution of the interval effect between rounds.

  FIG. 51A shows that the eighth round of the big hit game is being executed, and that the first variable winning opening 234 is open. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a), 8R characters are displayed (the number of rounds is displayed). Further, in the decorative design display device 208, a haniwa character C1 appears as a big hit game effect, and a big hit effect including the character C1 is performed. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize total number display capable of specifying the number of prize balls obtained by prize winning in the variable prize hole from the start of the big hit game to the present is displayed. That is, in FIG. 51 (a), since 79 game balls have been won in the first variable winning opening 234 from the start of the big hit game to the present, in this production example, the first variable winning opening 234 is returned to the first variable winning opening 234. Since the number of prize balls for the prize is 15 and the maximum number of prizes in one round is 10, the number of prize balls acquired is 1185, and "1185 pt" indicating this is displayed as the total number of prize winnings. In FIG. 51 (a), in the eighth round, nine game balls to the first variable winning opening 234 are effectively won, and two game balls (tenth and eleventh) are placed in the first round. A state is shown in which the variable winning opening 234 has been received and has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the number of game balls winning in the first variable winning opening 234 becomes 10 and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 reaches the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234 is closed and the first variable winning opening 234 is closed. The variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state. At this time, the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet passed the first count switch SW1. Thereafter, when the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 51B, the over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. Is output. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (b), the number of game balls corresponding to the number of over-wins is counted and displayed on the total win display. In other words, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable winning opening 234 after the start of the big hit game is set to 1215, and “1215pt” indicating that is displayed as the total winning display.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 51C, the ninth round is started. The first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 9C is opened, the first variable winning opening 234 is maintained in the open state, and the big hit effect display including the character C1 is continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, 9R characters are displayed (the number of rounds is displayed). In FIG. 51 (c), the first variable winning opening 234 has not yet been won, and the total winning display is still "1215pt" and has not been changed.

  FIG. 51D shows a state in which a power interruption has occurred for some reason after the start of the ninth round. When the power interruption occurs, the power interruption processing (step S408) of the main control unit main loop processing described above is executed, and the output port of the I / O 310 is cleared. The driving of the mouth 1 solenoid is stopped, and the first variable winning opening 234 is changed from the open state to the closed state.

  FIG. 51 (e) shows a state immediately after the power is restored, the return and start processing in the main control section power-on processing is executed, and the state before the power interruption is restored. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (e), a character display of "recovering power" is displayed as a return display. In addition, in the main control unit 300, since the control process of the big hit game has been returned to be executable, the driving of the big winning port 1 solenoid is restarted, and the first variable winning port 234 is changed from the closed state to the open state. FIG. 51E shows a state where the ninth round is being executed.

  Thereafter, a predetermined command (for example, an inter-round interval start command) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the sub-control unit 400, and as shown in FIG. An interval performance is performed. If a power failure or power recovery occurs during the execution of the big hit game, the data of the sub control unit winning counter stored in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 is cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), the winning total display after the power is restored is also "0 pt". In the present embodiment, after the power is restored, the display of the total number of winnings is not updated from "0 pt" even if there is a winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening until the big hit game is finished. Also, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), after the power is restored, the round number display and the display of “decoration 7” are not performed. Also, in FIG. 51 (f), while the first variable winning opening 234 in the ninth round is being opened, the eleventh game ball has entered the first variable winning opening 234, but the first count has still been reached. It is shown that the ball has not passed through the switch SW1 and is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234. That is, it can be said that this game ball is a game ball that will win (over-win) exceeding the maximum winning number.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), when the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over-winning occurs, an over-winning sound notifying the fact is given. Is output.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, even if a power failure or power recovery occurs during the execution of the big hit game, the data of the sub control unit winning counter stored in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 is not cleared. The display of the total number of winnings after the power is restored may be the same as that before the power interruption (display of “1215 pt”).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or power recovery occurs, the return of the sub-control unit (including the control circuit of the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like) is performed. Even if the processing is not completed, the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to execute various controls as long as the return processing of the main control unit 300 is completed. Therefore, even if a screen indicating that the power supply is being restored (for example, the display of “power is being restored”) is being performed, the main control unit 300 performs various controls (in the present embodiment, if the return processing is completed). , Jackpot control) can be executed. Here, when a prize in the large winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening) is detected during the restoration of the power supply, the total winning amount display is displayed including the amount of the prize during the restoration of the power supply. The display may be the same as before the power failure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the content of executing the over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs in the big hit game has been described. Good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of rendering means (for example, two or more rendering means of the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, 532, 542, the rendering movable body 224, and the shielding device 246). An over-prize effect may be performed. In this case, if a prize detection timer (special electric part 1 prize detection timer, special electric part 2 prize detection timer) is set regardless of timing, An over-winning effect may be performed by a plurality of effect means. In this case, an effect by a plurality of effect means (for example, “animation effect by the decorative design display device 208 (for example, a pose animation of a palace character)” and “effect sound such as“ Keen ”output from a speaker)” For example, to manage the data so that the display command and the voice output corresponding to the over-winning prize effect are one-to-one, or to manage the display command and the voice output separately to match only the output timing. The configuration may be such that the timing is synchronized, or the timing may not be synchronized.

  Also, an over-winning effect is performed by a plurality of effect means (for example, two or more effect means of the decorative design display device 208, the speaker 120, the various lamps 418, 532, 542, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246). In such a case, even if the winning detection timer (special electric winning combination 1 winning detecting timer, special electric winning combination 2 winning detecting timer) is set, some of the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker among the speakers 120) are set depending on the timing. 120) perform an over-winning effect (for example, output of a sound effect called “Kean”), and for other effecting means (for example, the decorative design display device 208), an over-winning effect (for example, a determined pose of the character of the lord) Animation).

  More specifically, when an over-winning occurs in an interval between rounds, an over-winning effect is performed by a plurality of effect means, and from when the next round starts until the winning detection timer becomes unset. When an over-winning occurs, an over-winning effect may be performed by some of the effecting means, or when an over-winning occurs at an interval between rounds, the over-winning effect may be executed by a part of the plurality of effecting means. If an over-winning effect is executed and an over-winning occurs between the start of the next round and the time when the winning detection timer is not set, an over-winning effect by a plurality of effect means may be executed. In addition, for example, when the winning detection timer is set, the over-winning after the first sub-control unit 400 receives the winning end command or after the winning end display timer is set by the main control unit 300. May occur, an over-winning prize effect by some effect means may be executed. Also, for example, when the winning detection timer is set, after the big hit game ends and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the change waiting command, or the hit end display timer in the main control unit 300 times out. If an over-winning prize occurs after this, an over-winning prize effect by some of the effect means may be executed. Further, for example, when the winning detection timer is set and an over-winning occurs after the first sub-control unit 400 receives the first fluctuation start command after the big hit game ends, An over-winning prize effect by some effect means may be executed. When an over-winning prize occurs other than the above, an over-winning prize effect may be executed by a plurality of effect means. It should be noted that operations reverse to those described above may be performed.

  The plurality of effect means may be two or more kinds of effect means. For example, the effect means may be constituted by two or more kinds of display means, sound output means, light emitting means, effect movable means and the like. Good. Here, the light emitting means may be one light emitting body (LED or lamp), or may be constituted by a plurality of light emitting bodies (LED or lamp) mounted on one base, The light-emitting body may be mounted on a plurality of substrates one by one or in plurals, and may be configured as one unit. Further, the effect movable means may be provided on a door body, a game board 200 or the like. Here, the door body may or may not include the inner frame (for example, the main body 102).

  Further, the plurality of effect means may be constituted by two or more identical effect means, for example, may be constituted by three effect movable means provided on the game board 200.

  In the above description, the over-winning effect is realized by the output of the over-winning sound by the speaker 120 and the over-winning effect display by the decorative symbol display device 208. It is also possible to realize by a member.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the second variable winning opening 235 is in the open state or the closed state, the second variable winning opening 235 is set to the period (first valid period) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer. For example, the first over-winning sound may be output, which may give the player a sense of benefit and improve the interest of the game.

<Other Embodiment 2>
Next, another embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing stepwise a modification of the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 49. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that, in this effect example, rounds 1 to 13 are rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234a is open, and rounds 14 and 15 are rounds in which the second variable winning opening 235a is open. Further, in this effect example, in the 14th round, the time during which the V shutter 2352a is in the open state is short (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a. However, it is configured such that V passage is difficult.

  FIG. 52 shows a decorative symbol display device 208 and a speaker 120. In addition, corresponding to the first variable winning opening 234a, the open / close state of the first variable winning opening 234a, the number of balls in the first variable winning opening 234a, the main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 1, Corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235a, the open / close state of the second variable winning opening 235a, the number of balls entering the second variable winning opening 235, the main control unit winning counter 2 and the sub-control unit winning counter 2 are shown. ing. In addition, the first variable winning opening 234a which is the first attacker, the second variable winning opening 235a which is the second attacker, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, Illustration of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 is omitted. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 49, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened at the 14th round, and the second variable winning opening 235a is not opened. However, in the embodiment shown in FIG. , 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the first variable winning opening 234a is not opened.

  FIG. 52 (a) shows that the 14th round of the big hit game with the 15R special big hit is being executed. As shown in FIG. 52 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the 14th round of the jackpot game and urges the player to make the V pass in the next round, that is, the 15th round. Is displayed to the effect. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive villas is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This big hit game is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (normal game state). "First time" is displayed. In the fourth special symbol t1 of the special figure 1, a black circle symbol corresponding to the "special figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 52 (a), seven game balls to the second variable winning opening 235a are effectively won, one game ball is received by the second variable winning opening 235a, and the second count switch SW2 is still in the state. Are not passed. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning of the game balls to the variable winning opening (displaying the winning number) is shown. In FIG. 52 (a), seven games to the second variable winning opening 235a are shown. “7” is displayed corresponding to the winning of the ball. Here, the count of the number of extended holidays is performed as follows. That is, the counting is started from the big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “first big hit”) generated in the normal game state (the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state), and the period of the power support state after the end of the first big hit big hit game. In the case of (probable change state or time saving state), it is counted when there is a big hit again. The count is terminated when the power-saving state is not shifted to after the end of the big hit game of the first big hit, or when the power-supported state (ST or time-saving state) shifted to after the big hit game of the first big hit is ended. In addition, even if it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the big hit game, the count of the number of extended games may be continued up to a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times after the end of the big hit game). Note that the number of extended holidays is counted only when a big hit (15R big hit, 5R big hit, RUB, 2R big hit, etc.) occurs, and is not counted even if a small hit occurs. In addition to small hit symbols, big hits that cannot be expected to get a ball, such as hidden probabilities, sudden probabilities (sudden probabilities), sudden time savings (sudden times), and sudden normal big hits (rushes), are also counted in the number of extended villas. The jackpot may not be set, or some of the jackpots may be counted in the number of extended games. For example, in the case of a sudden jackpot or a latent jackpot in the normal gaming state, the counting may be started as the first jackpot or the counting may not be started. Also, for example, a sudden hit may be counted, and a latent hit may not be counted. Further, for example, a latent big hit may be counted and a sudden big hit may not be counted. In addition, the small hits are not counted in the number of extended holidays, but the small hits may be counted. Also, the number of small hits may be counted separately from the number of large hits. Further, for example, when a sudden hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the counting may be started as an initial big hit that occurs in a time-saving state that shifts after the sudden hit.

  In FIG. 52 (b), the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “10” and the number of winnings in the second variable winning opening 235a becomes the maximum winning number, so that the second variable winning opening 235a is closed and The variable winning opening 235a is in a closed state. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays the characters 14R. That is, FIG. 52B shows that the remaining sphere is detected as described above. Further, since the value of the sub control unit winning counter 2 is “10”, the winning number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “10”. In FIG. 52 (b), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been received by the second variable winning opening 235a but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2 rolls in the second variable winning opening 235a. ing. This gaming ball is the eleventh winning game ball to the second variable winning opening 235a, and can be said to be a gaming ball that wins (over wins) exceeding the maximum winning number.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (c1), when the remaining ball detection state ends and the interval between rounds comes, the character display of 14R displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears. In the present embodiment, the round number display is erased at the timing after the second variable winning opening 235a is closed. However, the round number display may be erased at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235a is closed. Good. In FIG. 52 (c1), the game ball rolling in the second variable winning opening 235a in FIG. 52 (b) has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2 and is still rolling. It is shown.

  FIG. 52 (c2) is still during the inter-round interval. As shown in FIG. 52 (c2), the game ball rolling in the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the second count switch SW2, and the value of the main control unit winning counter 2 becomes “11”. However, since the large winning opening winning command relating to winning of the game ball in the second variable winning opening 235a of the game ball is not transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-controlling unit 400, the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 2 is It remains at “10”.

  FIG. 52 (c3) is still during the inter-round interval. In FIG. 52 (c3), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a special winning opening winning command relating to winning to the second variable winning opening 235a from the main control unit 300, whereby the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 2 is changed. It becomes “11”, and it is determined that there is an over-prize. Then, an over-winning sound that indicates that an over-winning has occurred is output from the speaker 120. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 52 (c3), a state in which an effect (over-winning effect) by the over-winning at the second variable winning opening 235a is performed during the interval between rounds. That is, in the present embodiment, in the big hit game, there is a period in which both the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a are in the closed state, and even in that period, the over winning effect can be executed. .

  Subsequently, in FIG. 52 (d), the fifteenth round is started. When the fifteenth round is started, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the open state is being maintained. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs character display of 15R indicating that it is the fifteenth round, and also calls “V aim” to promote V passing. The display is also performed. Further, the winning number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “0” because there is no winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235a. In the present embodiment, after the start of the round, the winning number display is configured to always display “0” first, but there are cases where “0” is not displayed and “1” is displayed. You may. For example, immediately after the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, the first count switch SW1 or the second count switch SW2 is played at a timing before displaying "0" in the winning number display. When the ball passes and the main control unit 300 transmits a special winning opening winning command to the first sub control unit 400, "1" may be displayed on the winning number display. Alternatively, the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 or the second count switch SW2 at the same timing as when the sub-control unit winning counter is set to 0 in order to set the winning number display to “0”, and the main control unit 300 When the special winning opening winning command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the above, "1" may be displayed on the winning number display. In addition, in the case of one round or one big hit, when the first winning in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a is performed, the display of the winning number display may be started. Good. For example, the winning number display is not displayed from the start of the first round after the big hit game is started until the winning of the first game ball, and the winning is displayed when the first game ball is won. The display of the numerical display may be started. In the second and subsequent rounds, at the start of the round, the number of winnings in the previous round is displayed on the winning number display as it is, and after the first winning, "1" is displayed on the winning number display. Is also good. Note that the display start timing of the winning number display indicating “0” may be simultaneous with the start of the round, or may be a timing after the start of the round. When the value of the sub control unit prize counter is “0”, the display of the number of prizes is not displayed (or only the frame indicating the area of the prize number display is displayed), and the value of the sub control unit prize counter is displayed. When "1" is displayed, the winning number display may be displayed. In this case, the timing at which the winning number display is erased may be when the variable winning opening is closed or when the next round is started. These are also applicable to the display of the number of acquired prize balls, the display of the total acquired prize balls, the display of the actual acquired prize balls, the display of the actual total acquired prize balls, and the like, which will be described later. Also, in FIG. 52 (d), there is no state where a game ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), when the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, passes through the second count switch SW2, and then passes through the V pass switch SW3, as shown in FIG. 52 (f). As shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “V”, which is a notification that the probability change acquisition has been determined, and also notifies the speaker 120 by voice output.

  FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c) are diagrams showing steps of another operation example in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 52. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 53 (a) is the same as FIG. 52 (c1), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows a case in which the ball has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the 14th round, the 15th round is started in a state where the ball has not yet passed the second count switch SW2, and the main control unit winning counter 2 And the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 2 have been cleared to "0". That is, the game ball entered in the 14th round passes through the second count switch SW2 after the start of the 15th round, and as described above, the V shutter 2352a is also in the open state so that V passing is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the game ball passes through the V passage switch SW3. As described above, in the operation examples shown in FIGS. 53A to 53C, the number of winnings in the second variable winning opening 235a becomes the maximum number of winnings and the maximum number of winnings before the second variable winning opening 235a closes. If a game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a exceeding the winning number and the next round is started before the game ball passes through the second count switch SW2, the next round is started. , It will not be an over prize.

  FIGS. 53D to 53E are diagrams showing modified examples of the successful effect.

  In FIG. 53 (d), similarly to the case shown in FIG. 48 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned promotion effect is performed in the fourth round, and as a result, the effect that succeeded in the promotion effect (success effect) ) Is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (e), an acquisition display indicating that a chance of passing V has been acquired is displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in the fifteenth round, it is notified that the second variable winning opening 235a is long opened and V passing is easy. The acquisition display shown in FIG. 53E has, for example, a form in which a character “V Chance GET” is added in a frame imitating the shape of a hexagram. Note that the display start timing of the acquisition display may be the same as the start of the successful presentation, may be the timing after the successful presentation has started, or may be the timing before the start of the successful presentation. There may be. As shown in FIG. 53 (e), the winning number display at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that three gaming balls have won the first variable winning opening 234a.

  FIGS. 53 (f) to (j) are diagrams showing an example of a specific effect in the big hit game. In this effect example, rounds 1 to 14 are rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened, and round 15 is a round in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened.

  FIG. 53 (f) shows the content of the effect in the 14th round. As shown in FIG. 53 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the 14th round of the big hit game and prompts the player to make the V pass in the next round, that is, the 15th round. The display "Aim for V at the next R" is displayed, and the display is performed by a wipe display at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the total number of acquired prize balls, and the number of acquired prize balls from the first jackpot (a jackpot in a normal game state that is neither a probable change state nor a time saving state) is “total xxxxGet”. , The number of remaining prize balls is displayed below, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the running jackpot game is displayed in a display mode of "remaining xxxx". ing. In FIG. 53 (f), the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game that has shifted to become the first jackpot, and in this jackpot game, 137 game balls are provided in the first variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a. Is displayed, and 2055 prize balls have been paid out. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (f), in the 14th round, seven gaming balls have been won in the first variable winning opening 234a. Therefore, in the 14th round, at least three remaining game balls can win, and in the 15th round, at least 10 game balls can win, so the total acquired prize ball number display is 137 × 15. = 2055 Get “Total 2055 Get”, and the remaining prize ball number display is (3 + 15) × 15 = 195 remaining “195 remaining”. Note that the total winning prize ball count is displayed by adding only the prize balls to be paid out by winning the first variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a. The number of prize balls paid out by winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, and the general winning port 226) is not added, but the number of prize balls paid out by winning in these winning ports. May also be added and displayed.

  FIG. 53 (g) shows a state during the inter-round interval to which the transition is made after the 14th round is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (g), the total winning prize ball display is indicated as “2100 Get” in total, indicating that 140 game balls have won, and the number of remaining prize balls. The display shows "150 remaining", indicating that at least ten game balls can be won in the fifteenth round (final round). In addition, a wipe display of “Aim for V at next R” prompting to perform V passing in the 15th round is also continuously performed. In FIG. 53 (g), in the 14th round, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a. is there. In other words, a game ball that becomes the eleventh prize in the first variable winning opening 234a is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a.

  FIG. 53 (h) shows a state where the fifteenth round has started. When the fifteenth round is started, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the open state is being maintained. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 53 (h), the character display of 15R indicating that it is the fifteenth round is performed, and "V aim" for promoting the passage of V is performed. The display is performed by wipe display. Also, the display of the total number of winning prize balls and the number of remaining prize balls are continuously performed. In the 14th round, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a but has not yet passed the first count switch SW1 has not yet passed the first count switch SW1, and the first variable winning opening 234a has not yet passed. Rolling inside.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (i), when the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, the speaker 120 outputs an over winning sound. Then, if the over-winning prize is included, 141 prizes are generated in this big hit game, so the total acquired prize ball number display is shown as “2115 Get in total”. On the other hand, since the prize for the over prize is not included in the prize count in the fifteenth round, at least ten game balls can be won in the fifteenth round. The display remains "150 remaining".

  FIG. 53 (j) shows a state in which the first big hit game ends and the game shifts to the certainty change state, and in the certainty change state, the second game big hit game is started and the first round is being executed. As shown in FIG. 53 (j), the decorative symbol display device displays that it is the first round of the big hit game. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the total acquired prize ball number display is performed, but the total acquired prize ball number display displayed here is because the big hit game is a big hit game of the second consecutive villa, Since the number of prize balls actually acquired in the first jackpot game is also displayed, the total is “2265 Get”. As described above, the display of the total number of winning prize balls includes the over-prize. On the other hand, since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R special big hit, the remaining prize ball number display is “maximum winning number (10 pieces) × round number (15R) × number of prize balls (15 pieces) ) = 2250 ”, which is“ remaining 2250 ”.

  In this example of the effect, the total winning prize ball number is displayed including the over-winning portion, but may be displayed without including the over-winning portion. Further, in this effect example, since the number of extended games can be estimated by looking at the total acquired prize ball number display, the number of extended games is not displayed. However, the number of extended games may be displayed.

  FIGS. 54 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing stepwise another operation example in the big hit game in the 15R special big hit shown in FIG. 52. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In this effect example, the time during which the V shutter 2352a is in the open state in the 14th round is long (for example, 24 seconds), and the game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a can easily receive the V It is configured to pass.

  FIG. 54A shows the effect contents in the thirteenth round. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, and prompts the player to make the V pass in the next round, that is, the fourteenth round. Is displayed to the effect. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In addition, the number of consecutive villas is displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. This big hit game is the first big hit game that has shifted from the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (normal game state). "First time" is displayed. In the fourth special symbol t1 of the special figure 1, a black circle symbol corresponding to the "special figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which 10 (maximum winning numbers) game balls have effectively won the first variable winning opening 235a. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning of the game balls to the variable winning opening (winning number display) is shown. In FIG. 54 (a), ten balls to the first variable winning opening 234a are displayed. “10” is displayed corresponding to the winning of the game ball.

  Subsequently, FIG. 54B shows the effect contents in the 14th round. In the 14th round, the second variable winning opening 235a is being kept open. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a character display of 14R indicating that it is the 14th round, and also calls "V aim" to promote V passing. The display is also performed. In addition, the winning number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “1” because one gaming ball has been won in the second variable winning opening 235a.

  However, for some reason, if the 14th round ends without the game ball passing through the V passage switch SW3 and the 15th round starts, the V passage is easy even in the 15th round. As shown in (c), even after the transition to the fifteenth round, the display “Aim for V” is continuously displayed. When the game ball passes through the V pass switch SW3 in the 14th round, the display of “V” is displayed to notify that the probability change has been determined, and the display of “V” is continuously displayed in the 15th round. Alternatively, a jackpot round display for the fifteenth round may be displayed.

  FIGS. 54D to 54G are diagrams illustrating another example of the presentation of the V notification. In this effect example, a light guide plate 208e is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light guide plate 208e is an example of a notifying unit that notifies V passage. A light source (not shown) (for example, an LED) is provided on a side surface of the light guide plate 208e. A pattern emerges on the light guide plate 208e when the light source emits light. That is, the light of the light source enters the thickness portion of the light guide plate 208e, and the light is reflected forward at the portion where the pattern is provided, so that the pattern is visually recognized as emitting light. In this effect example, when the light source emits light, the face T of the hero's main character's face appears on the light guide plate 208e. Note that, instead of the light guide plate 208e, a transparent liquid crystal display device may be arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 208.

  FIG. 54D shows a state where the fifteenth round has started. When the fifteenth round is started, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and the open state is being maintained. At this time, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state, and the V passage is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a 15R character to indicate that it is the fifteenth round, and also calls "V aim" to promote V passing. The display has been made. Further, the winning number display displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “0” because there is no winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235a.

  Thereafter, when the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a and passes through the V passage switch SW3, the light source provided on the side surface of the light guide plate 208e emits light as shown in FIG. The face T of the lord character emerges at 208e, and a voice to that effect is output from the speaker 120, and a notification (V notification) that the probability change acquisition has been confirmed is made. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed and the display screen becomes dark. This makes it easier to visually recognize the face T of the lord-like character that emerges on the light guide plate 208e. Therefore, the winning number display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also not displayed. Note that, in this effect example, if the V notification and the above-mentioned over-winning effect occur simultaneously, the V notification is executed with priority, and the over-winning effect is not performed while the V notification is being executed. Is also good. Further, during the execution of the V notification, the over-prize effect may be executed so as to be inconspicuous. For example, the over-winning sound output from the speaker 120 may be output smaller than usual. In addition, when the V notification and the over prize production occur simultaneously, the over prize production may not be performed while the V notification is being performed, and the over prize production may be performed partway after the V notification is completed. After the V notification, the over-prize effect may be performed from the beginning. Further, when the V notification and the over-winning effect occur simultaneously, both the V notification and the over-winning effect may be executed at the same time. Further, when the V notification and the above-mentioned over-winning effect occur simultaneously, the over-winning effect may be executed with priority, and the V-informing may not be performed during the over-winning effect. In addition, the V notification may be executed inconspicuously during the execution of the over winning effect. For example, the V notification sound output from the speaker 120 may be output smaller than usual. Further, when the V notification and the over-prize-winning effect occur at the same time, the V-notification may not be performed while the over-win-winning effect is being performed, and the V-notification may be performed halfway after the over-win-winning effect is completed. Alternatively, the V notification may be performed from the beginning after the over winning effect has been completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (f), the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted for a predetermined time (for example, After elapse of 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 54 (g), the light emission from the light source provided on the side surface of the light guide plate 208e ends, and the face T of the lord-like character on the light guide plate 208e becomes difficult to see. Is done. In addition, when the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted, the display of “V”, which is the notification that the probability change has been determined, is not performed, but the display of “V” may be performed. .

  In addition, for example, together with the display of the face T of the lord-like character by the light guide plate 208e, or instead of the display of the face T of the lord-like character by the light guide plate 208e, the operation of the shielding device 246 or the operation of the effect movable body 224 causes V Notification may be performed. At this time, the shielding device 246 or the effect movable body 224 may be moved to a position overlapping the decorative symbol display device 208, or an operation of vibrating on the spot may be performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the above-described effect example, the case where the game is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game on the condition that the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW3 is described. In addition, it is configured to shift to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game.

  FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the big hit game by the 15R special big hit, which will shift to the certain change state after the big hit game ends, is started, and the big hit game start effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the big hit game start effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character image of “probably big hit” together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here). An audio output indicating that a big hit has been made. The effect content of the jackpot start effect such as the jackpot game start effect display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed depending on the number of extended games, or the content of the jackpot game start effect regardless of the number of extended games. May be the same. In addition, the content of the jackpot game start effect may differ depending on the type of jackpot (probability change, time saving, RUB, number of rounds executed, number of real rounds, presence / absence of electric support after completion of jackpot game). .

  When the first round is started after the big hit game start effect ends, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is maintained. In the decorative design display device 208, 1R characters are displayed in the upper left corner as the number of rounds, and the first round is notified. In addition, a display prompting right-handing is displayed at the upper center, informing the player of right-handing. The display for prompting the right-handed player may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the big hit game. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed continuously until the big hit game end effect starts. Below the display of “decoration 7”, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b), since the game is the first big hit game, “first time” is displayed as the display of the number of extended games. Further, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 55 (b), there is no game ball winning in the variable winning opening, and therefore, “0” is displayed as the acquired winning ball count display. Note that the above-described total acquired prize ball number display may be performed instead of the acquired prize ball number display. In the display of the number of acquired winning prize balls, only the number of prize balls paid out by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a is added and displayed. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, and the general prize port 226) is not added. May be added and displayed.

  FIG. 55 (c) shows a state in which the first round has been completed and the process has shifted to the inter-round interval. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (c), the display of the number of rounds is erased, and ten game balls are won in the first round. The number of balls is 150, and “00150” is displayed as the acquired prize ball number display. At this time, in the first variable winning opening 234a, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round but has not yet passed the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234a. Moving.

  Thereafter, when the second round is started, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 2R characters as the number of rounds. At this time, the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, and the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes "11". However, since the large winning prize winning command relating to the winning of the game ball into the first variable winning prize 234a is not transmitted from the main controller 300 to the first sub-controller 400, the value of the sub-controller winning counter 1 is It remains "10".

  After that, the first sub control unit 400 receives a special winning opening winning command relating to winning to the first variable winning opening 234a from the main control unit 300, and thereby the value of the sub control unit winning counter 1 becomes “11”, It is determined that there is an over-prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, in the display of the number of acquired prize balls, the over prize is added, and “00165” is displayed.

  FIG. 55 (f) shows a state where the game in the second round is continuously executed. In FIG. 55 (f), the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning opening and passed the count switch is thirteen, but one of them is sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. Since the special winning opening winning command has not been transmitted, the value of the sub control unit winning counter 2 is "1". Therefore, in the display of the number of acquired prize balls, “00180” corresponding to the winning of 12 game balls is displayed.

  After that, the 15th round in which the big hit game progresses and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened is executed, and ten game balls win in the second variable winning opening 235a (the value of the main control unit winning counter 2 is set to 10). When it becomes "10"), as shown in FIG. 55 (g), the second variable winning opening 235a is closed, and the second variable winning opening 235a is in a closed state. In this effect example, the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening in the period from the start of the big hit game to the timing shown in FIG. 55 (g) is 151 including one over-winning. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is “the number of winnings in the variable winning opening 151 × the number of prize balls = 2265”, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “02265” as the acquired prize ball number Is displayed. In FIG. 55 (g), one game ball (remaining ball) that has been accepted by the second variable winning opening 235a but has not yet passed through the second count switch SW2 is rolled in the second variable winning opening 235a. Moving. That is, an over prize is generated.

  Thereafter, when the fifteenth round is completed, a big hit game end effect (big hit end effect) is performed as shown in FIG. 55 (h). That is, the main control unit 300 is in a state in which the hit end display timer is operating. In this effect example, since the jackpot was won with the probable change symbol, the game is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the big hit end effect, the display of "probable RUSH rush" indicating that the state is shifted to the probable change state is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the big hit end effect, the number of acquired prize balls in the big hit game is displayed. Further, at this time, the game ball rolling in the second variable winning opening 235a passes through the second count switch SW2, an over-winning occurs, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. As described above, in the present embodiment, the over-winning prize effect can be executed during the execution of the big hit end effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (h), the number of acquired prize balls is displayed without including the over prize generated during the execution of the big hit end effect. The number display may be updated and displayed so as to include the over winning. In other words, when the winning prize ball display is “02265Get” in the big hit end effect and an over-prize is generated, the number of prize balls for one prize is added and displayed as “02280Get”. Is also good. In addition, for example, when the set time of the winning detection timer is longer than the elapsed time of the end display timer (for example, 30 seconds), the big hit game is ended, and after the symbol change display is started, the count switch is continued. May still be valid. In this case, after the symbol change display is started, a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening passes through a count switch, and an over-winning may occur. In this case, the over-winning sound may be output during the symbol variation display, or the over-winning sound may not be output.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the jackpot game start effect shown in FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 56 (a) shows a state in which a jackpot game start effect in which the number of consecutive villas is a specific number (for example, 10) is being executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), when the jackpot game of the tenth villa is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 celebrates the jackpot peculiar to the tenth villa in the background image (omitted here). In addition, the character display of "probably big hit" is displayed. In addition, below the character display of "Sure-change big hit", the character display of "Holiday 10-so" to celebrate the big hit of the tenth villa is also displayed. Then, instead of the audio output indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot, the speaker 120 outputs an audio message “10th celebration” to celebrate the jackpot of the tenth villa. Here, a sound output to the effect of a probability change big hit may be further performed. In the main control unit 300, the win start display timer is operating. In this state, an over-winning effect is not performed because an over-winning win does not actually occur.

  FIGS. 56B to 56F are diagrams showing an example of a specific effect example in the big hit game.

  FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the first round has been started after shifting to the first big hit game. When the first round is started after the big hit game start effect ends, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is being maintained. In the decorative design display device 208, 1R characters are displayed in the upper left corner as the number of rounds, and the first round is notified. In addition, a display prompting right-handing is displayed at the upper center, informing the player of right-handing. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed continuously until the big hit game end effect starts. Below the display of “decoration 7”, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 56 (b), since it is the first big hit game, "1st time" is displayed as the display of the number of extended games. In addition, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, the above-described total acquired prize ball number display is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 56 (b), there is no game ball winning in the variable winning opening yet, so that "00000" is displayed as the total acquired prize ball number display. In the effect example shown in FIG. 56 (b), an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this effect example, the display of the total number of acquired prize balls and the display of the number of acquired prize balls are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which, in the first round, ten game balls have been won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the first variable winning opening 234a has been closed, and the closed state is being maintained. I have. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in each of the total acquired prize ball number display and the acquired prize ball number display, a display corresponding to ten winnings in the variable winning opening is performed.

  FIG. 56 (d) shows a state in which the first round has been started after a transition to the jackpot game of the tenth villa. When the big hit game start effect ends and the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “10th time” indicating ten consecutive villas as the display of the number of consecutive villas. The total winning prize ball number display shows the number of prize balls “20250” obtained by winning a prize in the variable winning opening from the first jackpot game to the previous (ninth) jackpot game. In this example, since no over-winning has occurred between the first jackpot game and the previous jackpot game, the total number of winning prize balls is “the number of winnings to the variable winning opening in one round (10 ) × the number of prize balls (15) × the number of rounds executed in one big hit (15R) × the number of big hit games executed from the first time to the previous time (9 times) = 20250 pieces.

  Thereafter, when ten game balls are won in the first variable winning opening 234a (the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes “10”), as shown in FIG. 56 (e), the first variable winning opening is reached. 234a is closed, and the first variable winning opening 234a is maintained in a closed state. In this effect example, the number of game balls that have won the variable winning opening in the period from the start of the big hit game of the tenth villa to the timing shown in FIG. 56 (e) is ten. Therefore, at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (e), the number of prize balls acquired after the start of the jackpot of the tenth villa is calculated as “the number of prize balls to the variable winning opening (10) × the number of prize balls (15) = 150 ”, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays“ 150Get ”as the acquired prize ball number display. In addition, in the total winning prize ball display, the total winning prize ball at the time when the jackpot of the tenth villa starts is added to the number of prize balls obtained since the start of this big hit, and "20400" is displayed. Is displayed.

  FIG. 56F shows a state where the second round has started. When the second round is started, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs 2R character display as the number of rounds display. At this time, since the eleventh game ball entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round, an over-winning occurred in the second round, and the speaker 120 turned on at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (f). An over winning sound is output. At this time, in the display of the total acquired prize balls, the over winning (15 prize balls) is added and “20415” is displayed. However, the over winning is not added in the acquired prize ball display. It remains "150Get". As described above, in the present effect example, the total winning prize ball number display during the extended holiday is displayed in consideration of the over prize winning amount, but the acquired prize ball number display is displayed without considering the over winning prize amount. In the display of the total number of winning prizes in the consecutive villas, the display may be performed without considering the over-prize, and in the display of the acquired prize balls, the display may be performed in consideration of the over-prize.

  FIG. 56 (g) is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect of the jackpot game end effect. In the big hit game end effect shown in FIG. 56 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the display of the number of acquired prize balls with a ST (Special Time) count of 110 in the probable change state to be shifted after the end of the big hit game. “110G” indicating that there is is displayed. Here, the number of times of ST is the number of times of symbol variation display controlled to be in the probable change state. Instead of the number of times of ST, the number of times of symbol variation display controlled to the power support state or the time saving state may be displayed. Also in this effect example, during the execution of the jackpot game end effect, an over-winning has occurred, and the over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120.

  FIGS. 56 (h) to (i) are diagrams showing another example of the jackpot game end effect shown in FIG. 55 (h). FIG. 56 (h) shows an effect similar to that of FIG. 56 (g). After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the effect display shown in FIG. 56 (h), as shown in FIG. 56 (i), a special effect to celebrate Dalian Villa is executed. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the hero's lord is displayed, and an effect that is executed only in the big hit game of ten or more condominiums from the speaker 120, "I'm still going to continue," is executed. The execution time of the big hit game end effect shown in FIGS. 56 (h) to (i) is the same as the execution time of the big hit game end effect shown in FIG. 56 (g), but may be different. Good. Further, when an over-winning prize occurs while the effect shown in FIG. 56 (i) is being executed, the over-winning effect may or may not be executed. The effect shown in FIG. 56 (i) may be always executed in a jackpot game of 10 or more villas, or may be a jackpot game of 10 or more villas and has a predetermined probability (for example, 25 %) May be executed when the lottery result is won.

  FIG. 56 (j) to FIG. 56 (l) are diagrams showing modified examples of the over winning effect. FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which the first variable winning opening 234a has 10 game balls winning in the first round, the first variable winning opening 234a is closed, and the closed state is maintained. I have. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the total winning prize ball number display is displayed, and since it is the first big hit game, “00150” is displayed according to ten winnings in the variable winning opening. I have. In FIG. 56 (j), the decoration lamp 532a (see FIGS. 3 and 60), which is one of the game board lamps 532, arranged at the lower right of the decoration symbol display device 208 during the round in the big hit game. The light emission mode is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (k), when an over-winning occurs in the inter-round interval shifted after the end of the first round, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the over-winning sound. An over-winning display indicating that an over-winning has occurred in the corner is displayed (character display of "over-winning" together with the main character's character and a thousand boxes), and the decorative lamp 532a is illuminated in a light emitting mode to notify the over-winning. Done.

  Further, when an over-winning occurs in the big hit game end effect, as shown in FIG. 56 (l), only the lamp is turned on in a light emission mode for notifying the over-winning by the decorative lamp 532a, and The output of the over-winning sound and the over-winning display on the decorative design display device 208 may not be performed.

  In this way, the over-winning effect may be executed by a plurality of notification means (decorative symbol display device 208, decorative lamp 532a, speaker 120). In this case, for example, the operation according to the overwinning operation pattern by the shielding device 246 or the effect movable body 224 may be performed. The over-prize notification is not limited to the sound output by the speaker 120, but may be replaced by other notification means (for example, the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body, etc.) instead of the sound output device such as the speaker 120. 224).

  FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the big hit game. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In this example, the first to third rounds and the fifth to fifteenth rounds are rounds in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened, and four rounds are rounds in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened. In the fourth round, the V shutter 2352a is in the open state for a long time (for example, 24 seconds), and a game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a easily passes through the V. Have been.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows that in the fourth round, the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, passes through the second count switch SW2, passes through the V pass switch SW2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, In addition to the display of “V” indicating that the probability change acquisition has been confirmed, a state in which the speaker 120 is performing the notification by voice output is shown. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In the fourth special symbol t1 of the special figure 1, a black circle symbol corresponding to the "special figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Further, the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the fourth symbol. Since the big hit game of this time is the first big hit game, the display of the "first time" is displayed to that effect. In addition, a winning number display is shown in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 57 (a), in response to one gaming ball winning the second variable winning opening 235a, " 1 "is displayed.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which ten gaming balls have won the second variable winning opening 235a, the fourth round has been completed, and a transition has been made to an interval between rounds. When the process shifts to the interval between rounds, the character display of 4R displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears.

  FIG. 57 (c) shows a state where the fifth round has started. When the fifth round is started, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is being maintained. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit round effect that is executed on condition that there is V passing is executed. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “Vget” for notifying that V has passed is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that V passing has occurred. Further, in FIG. 57 (c), since the game balls have not yet been won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the winning number display shows "0".

  FIG. 57D shows a state in which the fourth round of the jackpot game of the tenth villa is being executed. In FIG. 57 (d), the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235 a, passes through the second count switch SW 2, passes through the V pass switch SW 2, and obtains the probability change acquisition in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition to the display of “V”, which is the notification of the completion, the notification by voice output is also performed from the speaker 120. In the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is displayed. In the fourth special symbol t1 of the special figure 1, a black circle symbol corresponding to the "special figure A" stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed. Further, the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the fourth symbol. Since the big hit game of this time is the big hit game of the tenth villa, the display of "10 times" is displayed to that effect. In addition, a winning number display is shown in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 57 (d), "1" in response to one gaming ball winning the second variable winning opening 235a is displayed. 1 "is displayed.

  FIG. 57 (e) shows a state in which ten gaming balls have won the second variable winning opening 235a, the fourth round has been completed, and a transition has been made to an interval between rounds. When the process shifts to the interval between rounds, the character display of 4R displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears.

  FIG. 57F shows a state where the fifth round has started. When the fifth round is started, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is being maintained. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit round effect that is executed on condition that there is V passing is executed. The jackpot round effect executed here is a unique effect executed on condition that it is ten consecutive villas. In addition, in the case of 10 consecutive villas, this unique effect may be always executed, or in the case of 10 consecutive villas, a lottery is further performed, and as a result, it is executed when a winning is achieved. Is also good. In addition, this unique effect may be executed every ten consecutive villas, or may be executed every time in a big hit game occurring after the ten consecutive villas. In addition, on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “Vget” for notifying that V has passed is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that V passing has occurred. Further, in FIG. 57 (f), since the game balls have not yet been won in the first variable winning opening 234a, the winning number display shows "0".

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the big hit game. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the case where the game is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW3 is described. In addition, it is configured to shift to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. In this example of production, the number of award balls that can be obtained when winning in the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a is different, and when winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, 15 balls are won. Are obtained, and when the player wins the second variable winning opening 235a, 14 prize balls are obtained.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows a state where the big hit game has started and the first round has started. As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is being maintained. In the decorative design display device 208, 1R characters are displayed in the upper left corner as the number of rounds, and the first round is notified. In addition, a display prompting right-handing is displayed at the upper center, informing the player of right-handing. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed continuously until the big hit game end effect starts. Below the display of “decoration 7”, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 58 (a), since it is the first big hit game, "1st time" is displayed as the display of the number of extended games. Further, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), there is no game ball winning in the variable winning opening, and therefore, “0” is displayed as the acquired winning ball count display. Note that the above-described total acquired prize ball number display may be performed instead of the acquired prize ball number display.

  FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which one game ball has won the first variable winning opening 234a.

  FIG. 58 (c) shows a state in which the first round has been completed and the process has shifted to the inter-round interval. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (c), the display of the number of rounds is deleted, and ten game balls are won in the first round. The number of balls is 150, and “00150” is displayed as the acquired prize ball number display. At this time, in the first variable winning opening 234a, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round but has not yet passed the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234a. Moving.

  Thereafter, when the second round is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 2R characters as the number of rounds. At this time, the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, and the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes "11". However, since the large winning prize winning command relating to the winning of the game ball into the first variable winning prize 234a is not transmitted from the main controller 300 to the first sub-controller 400, the value of the sub-controller winning counter 1 is It remains "10".

  After that, the first sub control unit 400 receives a special winning opening winning command relating to winning to the first variable winning opening 234a from the main control unit 300, and thereby the value of the sub control unit winning counter 1 becomes “11”, It is determined that there is an over-prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. That is, it can be said that an over-winning sound is output to the attacker (first variable winning opening 234a) having a large number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round (2R) having a small number of prize balls that can be obtained. The output of the over-winning sound to the attacker (the second variable winning opening 235a) having a small number of prize balls that can be obtained in a round with a large number of winning prize balls (a round in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened) is also performed. It can be carried out. In the display of the number of acquired prize balls on the decorative symbol display device 208, an over-winning amount in the first variable winning opening 234a is added, and “00165” is displayed.

  FIG. 58 (f) shows a state where the game in the second round is continuously executed. In FIG. 58 (f), two game balls having the second variable winning opening 235 a have won, but for one of them, the big winning opening winning command from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 has been transmitted. Therefore, the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 2 is “1”. Since the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the second variable winning opening 235a is 14, in the display of the acquired winning prize balls, the prize balls paid out for winning the eleventh first variable winning opening 234a are displayed. “00179” indicating the total (179) of the number and the number of prize balls paid out for winning the one second variable winning opening 235a is displayed.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating another example of the over-winning prize effect applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in the above-described effect example, the case where the game is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes to the V pass switch SW3 is described. In addition, it is configured to shift to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. In this example of production, the number of award balls that can be obtained when winning in the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a is different, and when winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, 15 balls are won. Are obtained, and when the player wins the second variable winning opening 235a, 14 prize balls are obtained.

  FIG. 59A shows a state where the second round is being executed. In FIG. 59 (a), an over-winning occurs because the game ball that has won the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round passes through the first count switch SW1 after the start of the second round. In this effect example, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays which of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a has an over-winning. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character of the lord, and displays a balloon of the character display of “Over winning in the upper attacker”, so that an over winning occurs in the first variable winning opening 234a. That you have done. Since the first variable winning opening 234a has a larger number of prize balls paid out by winning than the second variable winning opening 235a, it may be possible to give the player a sense of value. The speaker 120 outputs an over-winning sound. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a), since one game ball has won the second variable winning opening 235a, the first variable winning opening 234a is won in the first round in the obtained winning ball count display. The number of prize balls acquired (the number of prize balls (11) x the number of prize balls (15) = 165), and the number of prize balls (prize number (1) x prize) acquired by winning the second variable winning opening 235a “00179” indicating the number of award balls (179) to which the number of balls (14) = 14 has been added is displayed.

  FIG. 59B shows a state where the third round is being executed. In FIG. 59 (B), the over-winning occurs because the game ball that has won the second variable winning opening 235a in the second round has passed the second count switch SW2 after the third round has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed and a balloon of the character display of "Over winning in lower attacker" is displayed, thereby notifying that an over winning has occurred in the second variable winning opening 235a. ing. The speaker 120 outputs an over-winning sound. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a has not yet been won in the third round, and one over-winning has occurred in the first variable winning opening 234a in the second round. In the third round, one over-winning prize to the second variable winning school 235a has occurred. Therefore, in the display of the number of prize balls acquired, the number of prize balls (the number of prizes) acquired by winning the first variable prize opening 234a in the first round is displayed. (11) x number of prize balls (15) = 165) In the second round, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the second variable winning opening 235a (number of prize (11) x number of prize balls (14) ) = 154), and “00319” indicating the total number of award balls (319) is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b '), the over-winning effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be performed for the over-winning to the second variable winning opening 235a. In FIG. 59 (b ′), the over-winning sound is output, but the over-winning sound may not be output. In other words, the over-winning effect is executed for the first variable winning opening 234a having a large number of prize balls obtainable when winning, and the over-winning is performed for the second variable winning opening 235a having a small number of winning balls obtainable when winning. The effect may not be executed. Alternatively, the content of the over-winning prize production may be made different.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows another example of the over winning effect. FIG. 59C shows a state where the second round is being executed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 59 (c), the upper attacker winning number display indicating the number of gaming balls winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the number of gaming balls winning the second variable winning opening 235a are displayed. And the lower attacker winning number display shown in FIG. In FIG. 59 (c), an over-winning has occurred because a game ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round passed through the first count switch SW1 after the second round was started. . In this effect example, only the output of the over-winning sound from the speaker 120 is performed without updating the upper attacker winning number display even if an over-winning occurs.

  FIG. 59D shows an upper attacker acquisition prize ball indicating the number of prize balls acquired by winning the first variable prize port 234a instead of the upper attacker prize number display and the lower attacker prize number display in FIG. 59C. The number display and the lower attacker acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired by winning the second variable winning opening 235a are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also in FIG. 59 (d), an over-winning occurs because the game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round passes through the first count switch SW1 after the start of the second round. . In this effect example, even if an over-winning occurs, the upper attacker-acquired prize ball number display is not updated, and only the over-winning sound from the speaker 120 is output.

  FIG. 60 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 showing another example of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 60 has an out-counting sensor SW5 that always detects a game ball flowing on a communication path communicating with a right path of a game area 124 formed between the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. Is provided. The out-count sensor SW5 detects a game ball fired toward the right path of the game area 124 by being hit right. That is, a game ball flowing down the left path of the game area 124 is not detected. In the big hit game, the probable change state, and the time reduction state, the player does not normally perform left-handed hit. In some cases, accurate information can be given to the player. In particular, in some cases, accurate information can be given to the player regarding the game ball fired toward the right route. Note that the out-count sensor SW5 may be provided in the out port 240. Also, the game balls collected from the out port 240 and each winning port (first variable winning port 234a, second variable winning port 235a, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232, general winning port 226, etc.). An out-count sensor SW5 may be provided on a ball passage through which a game ball collected by winning a prize passes. At this time, for example, when the attacker unit 2340 shown in FIG. 44 is employed in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 60, the game ball is set to the discharge ball detection switch SW4 provided in the second variable winning opening 235a. After passing, the game ball may further pass through the out-counting sensor SW5, or a game ball that has won a winning opening that does not include the discharge ball detection switch SW4 may pass through the out-counting sensor SW5. Alternatively, the number of outs may be counted by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the out-count sensor SW5 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge ball detection switch SW4. The out-count sensor SW5 may be provided on the firing rail. At this time, a sensor may be provided also in the foul passage in order to accurately calculate the number of shot balls. Further, the out-count sensor SW5 may be provided on a firing path formed between the inner rail 204 and the outer rail 202 of the game board 200, for example, a return prevention attached to the tip of the inner rail 204. It may be provided near the member.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the big hit game. The effect example shown in FIG. 61 is implemented by applying the game board 200 shown in FIG. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the big hit game with the 15R special big hit, which shifts to the certain change state after the big hit game ends, is started, and the big hit game start effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the big hit game start effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character image of "probably big hit" together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here). An audio output indicating that a big hit has been made. In this effect example, a main control unit out counter is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a sub control unit out counter is provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400. The main control unit out counter and the sub control unit out counter respectively count the number of game balls that have passed through the out-counting sensor SW5 during the jackpot game and during the power support state (during probable change and during working hours). The main control unit out counter and the sub control unit out counter may be configured to be cleared at the same time as the start of the big hit start effect, or may be cleared at a timing before the start of the big hit start effect. Or may be cleared at a timing after the big hit start effect has started.

  FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which a big hit start effect is being performed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (b), a right-handed notification image for notifying that a right-handed operation is required is displayed. In addition, a sound output to the effect of right-handing is also output from the speaker 120. The right-hit notification image is an image imitating the game board 200, in which a recommended launch route of the game ball is indicated by an arrow, and a character display of "Right-hit" is added. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that right-handing should be performed.

  When the first round is started after the big hit game start effect ends, as shown in FIG. 61C, the first variable winning opening 234a is opened, and the open state is being maintained. In the decorative design display device 208, 1R characters are displayed in the upper left corner as the number of rounds, and the first round is notified. In addition, a display prompting right-handing is displayed at the upper center, informing the player of right-handing. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed continuously until the big hit game end effect starts. Below the display of “decoration 7”, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 61 (c), since it is the first big hit game, "1st time" is displayed as the display of the number of extended games. In addition, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, an actual acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls substantially acquired in the big hit is displayed. The display of the actual winning prize ball count is based on the number of prize balls paid out by winning game balls into the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a, passing through the out-counting sensor SW5, and setting the sub control unit. This shows the actual number of acquired prize balls obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (out number) counted by the out counter. At the timing shown in FIG. 61 (c), no game ball has yet been won in the variable winning opening, and five game balls pass through the out-counting sensor SW5, and the value of the sub control unit out counter becomes “5”. Therefore, the actual acquired prize ball number is “−5”, but in the present embodiment, when the actual acquired prize ball number is less than “0”, the actual acquired prize ball number is displayed as “5”. 00000 "is displayed. When the actual winning prize ball number is less than “0”, a value less than 0 (for example, “−00005”) may be displayed as the actual winning prize ball number display. Further, instead of displaying the actual acquired prize ball count, an actual total acquired prize ball count display indicating the total acquired prize ball count substantially acquired may be performed.

  Thereafter, when one game ball wins the first variable winning opening 234a, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "00009" as the actual acquired prize ball number. That is, from the number of winning balls (15) obtained for one winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, the number of game balls counted by the sub-controller out counter through the out-counting sensor SW5 is determined. The display corresponding to the actual acquired prize ball number (9) obtained by subtracting the number (6) is performed.

  In FIG. 61 (e), ten gaming balls win in the first variable winning opening 234a, the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes "10", and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a is the maximum. Since the number has reached the number, the first variable winning opening 234a is closed and the state of detecting the remaining ball is shown. In FIG. 61 (e), one remaining ball that has been accepted by the first variable winning opening 234a but has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1 is rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a. . This game ball is an eleventh winning ball in the first variable winning opening 234a, and is an over-winning gaming ball. In the decorative symbol display device 208, since 10 game balls were won in the first variable winning opening 234a and 21 game balls were passed to the out-counting sensor SW5, the number of actually obtained award balls was displayed. “00129” is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (f) shows a state in which the first round has been completed and the process has shifted to the inter-round interval. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (f), the display of the number of rounds is erased, and ten game balls are won in the first round, and 27 game balls pass through the out-count sensor SW5. Therefore, the actual winning prize ball number is 123 with 10 winnings × 15 prize balls-27 out balls, and “00123” is displayed as the actual winning prize ball number display. At this time, in the first variable winning opening 234a, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round but has not yet passed the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234a. Moving.

  Thereafter, when the second round is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs 2R character display as the number of rounds display. After that, the number of out balls is 31 and “00119” is displayed as the actual acquired prize ball number display. The game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a has not yet passed through the first count switch SW1.

  Thereafter, the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, and the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 and the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 1 become "11", respectively. It is determined that there is a prize. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, in the actual winning prize ball number display, the number of over winnings is added and the number of out balls is 31, so "00134" is displayed.

  FIG. 62 (i) is a view showing a continuation of the effect example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 62 (i) following FIG. 61 (h), one game ball has been won in the second variable winning opening 235a, and 33 game balls have passed to the out-counting sensor SW5. The actual winning prize ball number is 147 when the number of winning prizes is 12 × the prize ball number of 15−the outgoing ball 33, and “00147” is displayed as the actual winning prize ball number display.

  FIGS. 62A to 62F are diagrams illustrating a modification of the display of the number of acquired prize balls.

  FIG. 62A shows a state when the second round is started. When the second round is started, as shown in FIG. 62A, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 2R characters as the number of rounds. Further, in this effect example, the acquired prize ball number display is displayed below the display of the number of consecutive villas. Here, the acquired prize ball number display is “00150” corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired, because the number of prizes won in the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round is ten.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), it is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (c). That is, in FIG. 62 (c), the display is switched from the display of the number of acquired prize balls to the display of the number of actual acquired prize balls. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), the number of out balls is 27, which corresponds to the actual number of winning balls (123) obtained by subtracting the out balls (27) from the number of winning balls (150). “00123” is displayed as the actual acquired number display.

  Further, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 62D, as shown in FIG. 62E, the display is switched from the actual acquired award ball number display to the acquired award ball number display again. As described above, in the present embodiment, by operating the effect button 136, the display of the number of acquired prize balls and the display of the actual number of acquired prize balls can be switched and displayed. The display of the total number of acquired prize balls and the display of the actual total acquired prize balls may be switched and displayed by operating the effect button 136. The operation means capable of switching between the display of the number of acquired prize balls and the display of the actual number of prize balls is not limited to the effect button 136, but may be, for example, the operation key unit 137, or a touch panel operable by a player. Or an effect lever may be provided to switch between the display of the number of acquired prize balls and the display of the actual acquired prize balls.

  FIG. 62 (f) shows the display of the number of acquired prize balls below the display of the number of consecutive games, and the display of the actual number of prize balls displayed below the display. As described above, the acquired prize ball number display and the actual acquired prize ball number display may be simultaneously displayed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a winning effect in a jackpot game. The following figure shows how the effect proceeds in alphabetical order in parentheses. In addition, in this effect example, when a big hit is caused by the certain hit symbol, the game is shifted to the certain hit state after the big hit game ends.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the big hit game by the 15R special big hit, which shifts to the certain change state after the big hit game ends, is started, and the big hit game start effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in the big hit game start effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character image of “probably big hit” together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here). An audio output indicating that a big hit has been made.

  When the first round is started after the big hit game start effect ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the first variable winning opening 234a is opened and the open state is being maintained. In the decorative design display device 208, 1R characters are displayed in the upper left corner as the number of rounds, and the first round is notified. In addition, a display prompting right-handing is displayed at the upper center, informing the player of right-handing. The display for prompting the right-handed player may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the big hit game. Further, “decoration 7” is displayed at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed continuously until the big hit game end effect starts. Below the display of “decoration 7”, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 63 (b), since it is the first big hit game, "1st time" is displayed as the display of the number of extended games. Further, below the display of the number of consecutive villas, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (b), one game ball to the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, and the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 is "1". Since the main control unit 300 has not transmitted the large winning opening winning command relating to winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234a to the first sub-controlling unit 400, the value of the sub-control unit winning counter 1 is " 0 ". Therefore, the display of the number of acquired prize balls is still "00000".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 receives a large winning opening winning command relating to winning to the first variable winning opening 234a from the main control unit 300, and thereby the sub-control unit winning. The value of the counter 1 becomes “1”. Therefore, in the acquired prize ball number display, "00015" indicating that 15 prize balls have been acquired is displayed. Further, in this effect example, every time there is a winning in the variable winning opening, a winning sound indicating that the winning has been made is output from the speaker 120. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that there is a prize in the variable prize port. The winning sound may be made different depending on, for example, the value (count number) of the sub control unit winning counter. The notification mode of the notification of the winning is not limited to the voice, but may be a display by the decorative symbol display device 208, a luminous body by the game board lamp 532, the game frame lamp 542, or the like, or the shielding device 246. Alternatively, it may be performed by the operation of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the main control unit winning counter 1 becomes "10", and the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234a becomes the maximum winning number. Therefore, the first variable winning opening 234a is closed and the first variable winning opening 234a is closed. The variable winning opening 234a is in the closed state maintenance state, which indicates that the remaining ball is being detected. In addition, since 10 game balls were won in the first round, the number of winning balls is 15 × the number of winning balls = 15, and the number of acquired prize balls is 150, and “00150” is displayed as the acquired prize ball number display. ing. A winning sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, in the first variable winning opening 234a, a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234a in the first round but has not yet passed the first count switch SW1 is rolled in the first variable winning opening 234a. Moving. Note that the winning sound may be made different only when the maximum winning number (the tenth) has been won. That is, when there is a winning of the maximum winning number, a specific winning sound may be output.

  FIG. 63E shows a state where the second round has started. In FIG. 63 (e), the game ball rolling in the first variable winning opening 234a passes through the first count switch SW1, and as a result, the value of the main control unit winning counter 1 and the sub-control unit winning counter 1 Are both "11". Therefore, an over-winning prize occurs, and an over-winning prize sound is output from the speaker 120. At this time, in the display of the number of acquired prize balls, the over prize is added, and “00165” is displayed. Note that, even if the winning is over, a normal winning sound may be output. Alternatively, only the notification of the winning, such as the output of a winning sound, may be performed, and the notification of the over-winning may not be performed even if an over-winning occurs. In addition, the notification (prize sound) indicating that there is a prize and the notification (over win sound) indicating that an over-prize has been made are different from each other, but the same notification mode may be used.

  The display of the number of acquired prize balls, the display of the actual acquired prize balls, the display of the total acquired prize balls, and the display of the actual total acquired prize balls described above are sent to the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a. The display is changed in accordance with the number of prize balls acquired by winning the prize. For example, in the power support state (probable change state / time saving state), the number of prize balls acquired by winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is calculated. These displays may also be performed. Further, these may be displayed including the number of award balls obtained by winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the general winning port 226.

In the above description,
"First production means [for example, speaker 120, decorative design display device 208],
Second rendering means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Variable winning means [for example, a first variable] in which a game ball can be changed to an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which the game ball is easy to enter and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to enter. Winning opening 234, second variable winning opening 235],
A passing area [for example, a first passing area, a second passing area] through which a game ball entering the variable winning means can pass;
A gaming table with
The variable winning means changes to the difficult-to-enter state when a maximum number of winning balls [for example, 10] passes through the passing area after the easy-to-enter state. Means,
The first effect means, when a game ball enters the variable prize means exceeding the maximum winning number, an over-prize effect [for example, the over-prize effect shown in FIG. 34 (g) and FIG. 35 (g). 39 (i)-(k3 '), the effect display in which the lord-like character C2 punches out the newly appearing haniwa character C3 shown in FIGS. 39 (i)-(j). ), An effect display in which a thousand boxes image C5 falling from above the display screen] can be executed,
The second effect means is an effect that changes in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable prize means (hereinafter referred to as “a prize effect [for example, a prize number display shown in FIG. 33 and FIGS. 35 to 38, The display means is a production means capable of executing a total winning display shown in FIG. 34]].
In the winning effect, the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the time the variable winning means enters the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state becomes a number corresponding to the maximum winning number [ For example, it is an effect that can be changed until it becomes 10].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the effect means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game machine having the characteristic of the effect means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where a player who has noticed the over-prize winning effect can be given a sense of superiority.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to exclude the over-winning portion of the effect from the effect that changes according to the number of winnings from being included in the effect. In some cases, the interest in the game can be improved without causing the player to feel the game.

  Here, the first effect means may be a means for effecting by outputting an image on a display device or the like, or a light emitting means such as an LED, in addition to the means for effecting the output by sound output from a speaker or the like, It may be a movable means such as a movable body for production, or a means for vibrating a member directly operated by the player such as a ball firing handle or a production button.

  In addition, the second effect means may be a means for effecting by displaying an image on a display device or the like, a means for effecting by outputting sound such as a speaker, or a light emitting means such as an LED. It may be a movable means such as a movable body for use, or a means for vibrating a member directly operated by a player such as a ball firing handle or an effect button.

  Further, the first effect means and the second effect means may be different kinds of effect means or may be the same kind of effect means. Further, the first effect means and the second effect means may be the same effect means (for example, both the first effect means and the second effect means are realized by the display means).

  In addition, the over winning effect may be different from the effect indicating a winning other than the over winning (for example, an effect executed when the first to tenth game balls win the variable winning means), or may be the same. It may be.

  Further, the second production means is a means capable of executing a third production different from the over-prize production and the prize production during the period in which the over-prize production is being executed. The effect may be an effect that may be performed, or the third effect may be an effect that can be executed during a period in which a jackpot game is executed before a power cut or power recovery occurs.

  Further, the winning effect in the period in which the over-winning effect is being executed may be an effect that can be executed in the execution period of the jackpot game after the occurrence of the power interruption / recovery.

  Further, the effect when only one over-winning prize is obtained and the effect when only two over-winning prizes are obtained may be the same or different. In addition, the effect contents may be made different depending on the number of over winnings, or the same effect may be obtained for all over winning numbers.

  If the number of over-winning wins becomes a predetermined number (for example, 90 or more in one big hit game and 6 or more in one round), it may be determined as an error. At this time, the information may be notified to a player or a game store.

  Further, the variable winning means may be one that can be changed only between an easy entry state and a difficult entry state, or one that can be changed to a state other than the easy entry state and the difficult entry state. You may. In addition, the variable winning means may always change between an easy ball entry state and a difficult ball entry state, or may not change between the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state.

  In addition, the passing area may be such that only game balls that have entered the variable winning means can pass through, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the variable winning means may pass therethrough. . Further, the passing area may be a region where a game ball that has entered the variable prize means must pass, or a case where a game ball which has entered the variable prize device may not pass.

  In addition, the first effect means may be a variable that can execute an over winning effect only when a game ball enters the variable winning means exceeding the maximum winning number, or may be variable when exceeding the maximum winning number. In addition to the case where a game ball enters the winning means, an over-winning effect may be executed. In addition, the first production means may always execute an over-prize effect when a game ball enters the variable prize means exceeding the maximum number of prizes, or may be a variable prize exceeding the maximum number of prizes. Even if a game ball enters the means, an over-winning prize effect may not be executed.

  The second effect means may be capable of executing only a winning effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the winning effect. In addition, the second effect means may always execute a prize effect, or may not execute the prize effect.

  Further, the winning effect changes until the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the time the variable winning means enters the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state becomes equal to the number corresponding to the maximum winning number. Or the number of game balls that enter the variable winning means from the time the variable winning means enters the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state corresponds to the maximum winning number. It may be possible to change the number until it reaches the number required. In addition, the prize production will always change until the number of game balls entering the variable prize means reaches the number corresponding to the maximum prize number from the time the variable prize means enters the easy entry state to the difficult entry state. The number of game balls that have entered the variable prize means from the time the variable prize means enters the easy entry state to the difficult entry state becomes the number corresponding to the maximum winning number. It may not change until.

Also, "the second effect means is an effect means capable of executing the winning effect even when the over-winning effect is not executed. [For example, as shown in FIG. Even if the number of game balls is less than the maximum winning number and no over-winning sound is output, the winning number is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second production means may be one in which only the prize-winning effect can be executed even when the over-winning effect is not executed, or even when the over-winning effect is not executed, The effect may also be executable. In addition, the second production means may be configured to always execute the prize production even when the over prize production is not performed, and may not perform the prize production even when the over prize production is not performed. There may be cases.

In addition, a game control means capable of executing a big hit game [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
The winning effect is an effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of one round in the jackpot game until the end of the round [for example, FIG. Winning number display shown in FIG. 35],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of winning game balls during a round may be easily grasped.

In addition, a game control means capable of executing a big hit game [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] is provided.
The winning effect is an effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game [for example, the winning shown in FIG. 34. Total number display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of gaming balls that have won the variable winning means during the big hit game may be easily grasped in some cases.

Further, "the second production means is a period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game until the start of the second round started after the first round, between rounds An interval effect [for example, an interval effect between rounds shown in FIG. 30 (e) or FIG. 40 (k1 ′) to FIG. 40 (k3 ′) or FIG. 50 (c-2), etc.]
The over-winning effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the inter-round interval effect. [For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (k2 ′), if there is an over-winning during the execution of the inter-round interval effect, a thousand boxes The effect display that the image C5 is falling from above the display screen is performed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there may be a case where it is possible to give a sense of value to the player and improve the interest of the game by producing an overprize during the interval production between rounds.

  Here, the second effect means may be capable of executing only the interval effect between rounds in a period from the end of the first round in the big hit game to the start of the second round. Then, in the period from the end of the first round in the big hit game to the start of the second round, effects other than the inter-round interval effects may be executable. In addition, the second effect means may be a means for always executing an inter-round interval effect in a period from the end of the first round in the big hit game to the start of the second round, During the period from the end of the first round in the jackpot game to the start of the second round, the inter-round interval effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the over-prize effect may be started only during the execution of the interval effect between rounds, or may be started other than during the execution of the interval effect between rounds. Further, the over-winning prize effect may be started without fail during the execution of the inter-round interval effect, or may not be started during the execution of the inter-round interval effect.

Also, "the second effect means is an effect means for starting the inter-round interval effect in place of the prize effect when the first round is completed [for example, FIG. 50 (c-2) As shown in the above, when the interval effect between rounds is performed, the winning number display is deleted.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a round is shifting.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Sound output means [for example, speaker 120];
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235)];
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235 (first variable winning opening 234)],
A first passage area [for example, a first passage area] through which game balls entering the first attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
The first attacker is closed when the first maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls pass through the first passage area after being opened. Attacker,
After the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, until the first valid period [for example, the time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer (for example, 3 seconds)] elapses, It is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid,
After the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the first state until the first validity period elapses. The first over-winning sound may be output by the sound output means by passing through the passing area [for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the prize is awarded after the second round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the sound output means. However, according to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the sound output means.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, regardless of the open / close state of the second attacker, the first over-winning sound may be output during the first validity period, so that the player has a good feeling. In some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the first passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the first attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the first attacker may also pass. It may be something. Further, the first passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the first attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the first attacker. .

  Further, after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker changes to the open state, the game ball passes through the first passage area until the first validity period elapses. Thereby, the sound output means may be configured to always output the first over-winning sound, or the first attacker may be changed from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker may be changed to the open state. After that, the first over-winning sound may not be output by the sound output unit when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses.

In addition, “the period in which the first attacker is in the open state is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid [for example, as shown in FIG. When the special power combination 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state, and when the special power combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first attacker is in the open state, there is a case where the passage of the game ball to the first passage area can be reliably made effective.

Also, "by passing the first maximum number of game balls through the first passage area, the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, then the second attacker is the second attacker Even after changing to the open state, during the period of the first valid period, the game output ball passes through the first passage area, so that the sound output means causes the first over-winning. Is configured to output sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, regardless of the opening / closing state of the second attacker, the first over-winning sound is always output during the first validity period, so that the player can obtain a more advantageous feeling. In some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, “a second pass area [for example, a second pass area] through which game balls entering the second attacker can pass,
The second attacker is configured to, when the second maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls pass through the second passing area after the opening state, enter the closed state. Is an attacker that changes to
In a period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. Is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state, and when the special electric utility 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the second attacker is in the open state, there is a case where the passage of the game ball to the second passage area can be surely made effective.

  Here, the second pass area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may also pass. It may be something. In the second passage area, a game ball that has entered the second attacker may always pass, or a game ball that has entered the second attacker may not pass.

Also, "a second validity period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer] has elapsed since the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state." Up to, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area is configured to be effective,
After the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the first attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second state until the second validity period elapses. The second over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit by passing through the passing area [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k), the second variable winning opening 235 in the second round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the prize wins after the third round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, an over-winning sound is output for each attacker, so that it is possible to increase the chance that the player can hear the over-winning sound, and to improve the interest of the game. There is.

  Here, after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the first attacker changes to the open state, the game ball passes through the second passage area until the second validity period elapses. By doing so, the sound output means may be configured to always output the second over-winning sound, or the second attacker may be changed from the open state to the closed state, and then the first attacker may be changed to the open state. After the change, the game output ball may pass through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses, so that the sound output unit may not output the second over-winning sound.

In addition, a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays is provided.
The display means displays an image that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area (hereinafter referred to as “first passage display [for example, the number of winnings in the first round shown in FIG. 33B). Display or a winning number display displayed in the upper attacker column shown in FIG. 35] ”).
The display means may be a display that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the second pass area (hereinafter referred to as a “second pass display [for example, the winning number in the second round shown in FIG. Display or a winning number display displayed in the lower attacker column shown in FIG. 35]]).
The display means is a means that can start displaying the first pass display when the first attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. 35 (b). As shown, when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, a winning number display corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234 is started],
The display unit is a unit that can start displaying the second passage display when the second attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIG. 33 (f) and FIG. 35 (f). As shown, when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the display of the winning number corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first passage display is started when the first attacker is in the open state, and the second passage display is started when the second attacker is in the open state. In some cases, the player can easily grasp the number of winnings in each attacker.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first over-winning sound may be output in the state where the second passing display is being performed, so that the player feels more advantageous and enjoys the interest of the game. In some cases, it can be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of executing displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not execute the plurality of types of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first pass display and the second pass display, or may be a display capable of displaying a display other than the first pass display and the second pass display. There may be. Further, the display means may always display the first pass display and the second pass display, or may not display the first pass display and the second pass display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of starting only the display of the first pass display when the first attacker is in the open state, or when the first attacker is in the open state. Alternatively, a display other than the display of the first passage display may be started. Further, the display means may be such that the display of the first pass display is always started when the first attacker is in the open state, or when the first attacker is in the open state. The display of the first passage display may not be started.

  Also, the display means may be capable of starting only the display of the second pass display when the second attacker is in the open state, or when the second attacker is in the open state. Alternatively, a display other than the display of the second passage display may be started. In addition, the display means may be configured to always start displaying the second pass display when the second attacker is in the open state, or when the second attacker is in the open state. The display of the second passage display may not be started.

In addition, the display means switches the display to the first pass display when the second attacker is in the open state after the first attacker is in the closed state from the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the winning number display is cleared and “0” is displayed. And the winning number display is changed from the display corresponding to the winning number to the first variable winning opening 234 to the display corresponding to the winning ball number to the second variable winning opening 235],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the number of winning balls in the first attacker or the number of winning balls in the second attacker can be easily recognized.

Further, the display means switches to the second passage display when the first attacker is in the open state after the second attacker is in the closed state from the open state. [For example, at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display is cleared to “0”, and the winning number display is changed to the second variable winning display. The display corresponding to the winning number in the winning opening 235 is changed to the display corresponding to the winning ball number in the first variable winning opening 234],
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the number of winning balls in the first attacker or the number of winning balls in the second attacker can be easily recognized.

In addition, the display means displays the first passage display when the second attacker is in the open state after the first attacker is in the closed state from the open state. This is a means for starting the display of the second pass display while keeping the state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), even if the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, it corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. The winning number display is maintained at “10” indicating that 10 winnings have been achieved, and the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of winnings in the first attacker and the number of winnings in the second attacker can be clearly recognized in some cases.

Further, the display means displays the second passage display when the first attacker is in the open state after the second attacker is in the closed state from the open state. This is a means for starting the display of the first pass display while keeping the same. [For example, even if the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained, and The display of the number of winnings corresponding to one variable winning opening 234 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of winnings in the first attacker and the number of winnings in the second attacker can be clearly recognized in some cases.

Also, “game control means capable of executing a big hit game [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300]
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays,
With
During execution of the big hit game, the display means changes a display (hereinafter, referred to as “ 34. [For example, as shown in FIG. 34, by displaying the total winning number display as shown in FIG. 34, the variable winning opening 234, The number of prize balls obtained by winning 235 is displayed in a manner that can be specified],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the second attacker is in the open state, the third passage display is continuously displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent a player from overlooking.

  Also, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize how much the attacker has been able to win a prize since the start of the big hit game.

  Here, the game control means may be capable of executing only the big hit game, or may be capable of executing other than the big hit game. Further, the game control means may always execute the big hit game, or may not execute the big hit game.

  The display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of executing displays other than the plurality of types of effect displays. In addition, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not execute the plurality of types of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game, or may be capable of displaying other displays than the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game. It may be something. In addition, the display means may always display the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game, or may not display the third pass display during the execution of the big hit game. Good.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. Indicates that the special electric part 2 is inactive.],
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the first attacker is in the closed state and the second attacker is in the open state, the first over-winning sound can be output during the first validity period. In some cases, the first over-winning sound can be made to appear as though the second attacker is in the open state, and the player can feel a sense of value.

Further, “first control means [for example, main control unit 300],
A second control unit [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] capable of executing the control of the sound output unit,
With
The first control means can transmit first passage information [for example, a special winning opening winning command] to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first passage area. Control means,
The second control unit is a control unit having a first storage area [for example, the sub-control unit winning counter 1 in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400],
The second control means controls the number of times the first pass information is received (hereinafter, referred to as “first pass Control means) capable of counting the number of times.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage times in the first storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means to the first output Control means capable of executing control to output an over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the area for storing the number of winnings corresponding to the first attacker is provided, the number of winnings to the first attacker can be reliably grasped even after the second attacker is in the open state. Therefore, the effect can be performed according to the information from the first control means, and the player can be relieved in some cases.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of executing only control of the sound output means, or may be capable of executing control of means other than control of the sound output means. In addition, the second control means may always execute the control of the sound output means, or may not execute the control of the sound output means.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information only to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first passage area, When the game ball passes through the first passage area, the first passage information may be transmitted to control means other than the second control means. Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information to the second control means only when the game ball has passed to the first passage area, In addition to the case where the game ball passes through the first passage area, the first passage information may be transmitted to control means other than the second control means. Further, when a game ball has passed to the first passage area, the first passage information may be transmitted to the second control means without fail, or the game to the first passage area may be performed. When the ball has passed, the first pass information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of counting only the first number of passes, or may be capable of counting the number of times other than the first number of passes. Further, the second control means may always count the first number of passes, or may not count the first number of passes.

  In addition, the second control means may be capable of storing the counted first pass count only in the first storage area, or may store the counted first pass count in other than the first storage area. The information may be memorable in an area. Further, the second control means may be configured to always store the counted first passage number in the first storage area, or may not store the counted first passage number in the first storage area. There may be cases.

  Further, the second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the first over-winning sound to the sound output means. It may be possible to execute only the control for outputting, or if the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means Control other than the control for outputting the first over-winning sound may be executable. Further, the second control means sends the first over-winning sound to the sound output means only when the value indicating the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number. May be executable, or even when the value indicated by the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, A control that causes the sound output means to output the first over-winning sound may be executable. In addition, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, control for causing the sound output means to output the first over-winning sound is always executed. It may output the first over-winning sound to the sound output means when the value of the first number of passes stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number. There may be a case where the control to make it not be performed.

  Note that the first control means is not limited to the main control unit 300, and may be the payout control unit 600, or may be composed of only the main control unit 300, or may be the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600. May be configured. That is, the first control means may be constituted by a plurality of control means.

In addition, there is provided “first passage detection means [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2)] capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first passage area,
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state when the first passage detection means detects the passage of the first maximum winning number of game balls after being in the open state. Yes,
The first passer is configured to be able to detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detecting means until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state until the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses.]
After the first attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker has changed to the open state, the first passage detection means until the first validity period elapses. When the passing of a game ball is detected by the above, the first over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit [for example, as shown in FIG. After the eleventh game ball that has entered the one variable winning opening 234 starts the second round, a winning is made before the period set by the special power 1 winning detection timer elapses, and the over winning sound is generated by the speaker 120. Output from
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the first attacker is closed and the second attacker is opened, the first over-winning sound can be output during the first validity period, In some cases, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first over-winning sound is being output even when the second attacker is in the open state, and to give the player a sense of value.

  Here, after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker changes to the open state, the game passage of the game ball is performed by the first passage detecting means until the first validity period elapses. When passing is detected, the first over-winning sound may be always output by the sound output unit, or the first attacker may be changed from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker may be operated. When the first pass detection unit detects the passage of the game ball after the change to the open state and before the first valid period elapses, the first over-winning sound is not output by the sound output unit. There may be.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above explanation,
"Production means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of productions,
First variable winning means [for example, a first variable winning opening 234] capable of changing between an easily entering state where a game ball easily enters and a difficult entry state where a game ball is difficult to enter;
A second variable winning means [for example, a second variable winning opening 235] capable of changing between the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state,
A first passage area [for example, a first passage area] through which a game ball having entered the first variable winning means can pass;
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first winning effect [for example, a winning number display related to the first variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 36 (b)],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second winning effect [for example, a display of the number of winnings associated with the second variable winning opening 235 shown in FIG. 37 (f)].
The first prize effect is a prize effect that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area during execution of the big hit game [for example, as shown in FIG. When the winning of the game ball to the 1 variable winning opening 234 is valid, the winning number display related to the 1st variable winning opening 234 is updated and displayed],
The second prize effect is a prize effect that can be started when a game ball wins in the second variable prize means during the execution of the big hit game [for example, as shown in FIG. When the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is valid, the winning number display related to the second variable winning opening 235 is updated and displayed],
The second winning effect is a winning effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter-ball state [ For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), if the winning of a game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is enabled after the next round starts, the winning number related to the second variable winning opening 235 The display is updated],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the effect means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game machine having the characteristic of the effect means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, even though the ball has entered the first variable prize winning means, the directing means executes as a ball entry effect of the second variable prize winning means, giving the player a sense of incongruity, In some cases, it is possible to watch the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first prize effect and the second prize effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first prize effect and the second prize effect. May be. In addition, the production means may always execute the first prize production and the second prize production, or may not execute the first prize production and the second prize production.

  In addition, the first variable winning means may be one that can be changed only to an easy ball entry state and a difficult ball entry state, or one that can be changed to a state other than the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state. It may be. In addition, the first variable winning means may always change between an easy-entering state and a difficult-to-enter state, or may not change between the easy-entering state and the difficult-to-enter state. Good.

  In addition, the second variable winning means may be one that can be changed only to an easy ball entry state and a difficult ball entry state, or one that can be changed to a state other than the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state. It may be. Further, the second variable winning means may always change between the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state, or may not change between the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state in some cases. Good.

  Further, the first passage area may be such that only the game ball that has entered the first variable winning means can pass through, or a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the first variable winning means. May also be able to pass through. Further, the first passing area may be one in which a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may pass through, or a case where a game ball that has entered the first variable winning means may not pass. There may be.

  In addition, the first winning effect may be one that can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area during the execution of the big hit game, or may be the first during the execution of the big hit game. May be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the passing area. In addition, the first winning effect may be started when the game ball passes through the first passage area during the execution of the big hit game, or may be started during the execution of the big hit game. The game may not start when the game ball passes through the passing area.

  In addition, the second winning effect may be started only when the gaming ball wins the second variable winning means during the execution of the big hit game, or may be started during the execution of the big hit game. It may be one that can be started other than when the game ball wins the second variable winning means. Further, the second winning effect may be started when the gaming ball wins the second variable winning means during the execution of the big hit game, or may be started during the execution of the big hit game. May not be started when a game ball wins the variable winning means.

  Further, the second winning effect may be one that can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state, After the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to start the game other than when the game ball passes the first passage area. Further, the second winning effect may be started when the game ball passes through the first passing area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter-ball state, The game may not start when the game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state.

  The effect means can be realized by a sound output means for outputting a sound, a display means capable of effect display, a light emitting means, or the like. For example, if the effect means is a sound output means, it can be realized by outputting a prize sound according to a prize to the first variable prize means and the second variable prize means.

  Further, the first winning effect and the second winning effect may be the same or different.

In addition, "the first prize production is a prize production that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area [for example, the display of the number of prizes in the first round shown in FIG. , The number of winnings displayed in the column of the upper attacker shown in FIG. 35]
The second prize effect is a prize effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have won the second variable prize means [for example, the display of the number of prizes in the second round shown in FIG. Winning number display displayed in the lower attacker column shown in 35).
A game ball characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first prize production and the second prize production can easily grasp the number of prizes to the first variable prize means and the number of prizes to the second variable prize means, respectively. There are cases.

In addition, "the effect means, when the first variable winning means is in the difficult ball entry state from the easy ball entry state, after the second variable winning means in the easy ball entry state Means for ending the first winning effect and starting the second winning effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, The winning number display is cleared to "0", and the winning number display corresponds to the number of winning balls to the second variable winning opening 235 from the display corresponding to the winning number to the first variable winning opening 234. Display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, after the second variable winning means enters the easy ball entry state, even if the first variable winning means receives a game ball, the first winning effect is not executed, and the second winning effect is not executed. Is performed, the player may feel uncomfortable and may be able to watch the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means.

In addition, the apparatus further includes "first passage detection means [for example, a first count switch SW1] capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first passage area,
A first valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power 1 winning detection timer] after the first variable winning means changes from the easy ball entry state to the difficult ball entry state. Until elapse, the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means is configured to be detectable,
In the second winning effect, after the first variable winning means is changed from the easy ball entry state to the difficult ball entry state, and subsequently, the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state, A prize effect started in place of the first prize effect when the passage of a game ball is detected by the first pass detecting means before the first valid period elapses. As shown in FIGS. 36 (c) to (d), the first variable winning opening 234 is in a closed state, and subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 37 (f) to (g), the second variable winning opening 235. When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first count switch SW1 before the time set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses after the is opened, the second variable winning opening 235 The winning number display is counted and displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, after the second variable winning means enters the easy ball entry state, if the first validity period is reached, the passage of the game ball is detected by the first passage detection means, and the first passage is detected. When the winning of the game ball to the variable winning means is detected, the second winning effect is started, so that the player feels strange, and the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means are more closely watched. May be able to.

In addition, it is configured such that, even during the period when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state, the passing of the game ball by the first passing detecting means can be detected [for example, FIG. As shown in the figure, when the special electric combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to the valid state, and when the special electric combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to the valid state.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to reliably detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detecting means.

In addition, “a second passing area [for example, a second count switch SW2] through which game balls entering the second variable winning means can pass,
During the period when the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth effective period”), if a game ball passes through the second passage area, a winning is determined. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, when the special power combination 2 is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to the valid state, and when the special power combination 1 is activated, the second count switch SW2 is activated. 1 count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the second variable winning means is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be possible to surely detect the passage of the game ball by the second passage detecting means.

In addition, the "second prize effect, the first effective period and the fourth effective period during the overlap period, when the game ball has passed through the first passage area, the first effective period This is a prize effect executed in place of the prize effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, a period in which the special power combination 1 prize detection timer is set and the first count switch SW1 is valid, and a second count switch If the game ball passes through the first count switch SW1 at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (g) in a period in which the period in which the SW2 is in the valid state overlaps, a winning related to the second variable winning opening 235 Numeric display is counted and displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, if the first valid period and the fourth valid period overlap each other, the first prize effect is not performed even if the game ball wins in the first variable winning means, Since the second winning effect is performed, the player feels strange and can more closely watch the first variable winning means and the second variable winning means.

Also, "one of the plurality of types of effects is a third winning effect [for example, a total winning display]
It is configured to be a prize when a game ball has passed to the first passage area,
The third prize effect is a prize that varies according to the total number of game balls that have won the first variable prize unit and game balls that have won the second variable prize unit during the execution of the big hit game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 34, by displaying the winning total number display, the number of winning balls obtained by winning the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present is specified. Display in a possible manner],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the second variable winning means is in the open state, the third winning effect is continuously displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking. .

Further, "the effect means is a display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays,
The first prize effect is a first prize effect display [for example, the display of the number of prizes related to the first variable prize port 234 shown in FIG. 36 (b)] among the plurality of types of effect displays.
The second prize effect is a second prize effect display [for example, a display of the number of prizes related to the second variable prize port 235 shown in FIG. 37 (f)] among the plurality of types of effect displays.
The first prize effect display is a prize effect display that can be started when a game ball passes through the first pass area during execution of the big hit game [for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is valid, the winning number display related to the first variable winning opening 234 is updated and displayed],
The second prize effect display is a prize effect display that can be started when a game ball wins in the second variable prize means during execution of the big hit game [for example, shown in FIG. 37 (h). Thus, when the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning opening 235 is valid, the winning number display related to the second variable winning opening 235 is updated and displayed],
The second prize effect display is a prize effect display that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable prize means changes to the easy ball entry state. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), if the winning of a game ball to the first variable winning opening 234 is enabled after the next round starts, the second variable winning opening 235 The winning number display is updated and displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, despite the fact that the ball has entered the first variable prize winning means, the display means executes as the ball entry effect of the second variable prize winning means. The variable winning means and the second variable winning means may sometimes be watched.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the first prize effect display and the second prize effect display, or may be a display other than the first prize effect display and the second prize effect display. It may be executable. Further, the display means may always execute the first prize effect display and the second prize effect display, or may not execute the first prize effect display and the second prize effect display. May be.

  In addition, the first winning effect display may be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area during the execution of the big hit game, or may be started during the execution of the big hit game. It may be possible to start the game other than when the game ball passes through one pass area. Also, during the execution of the big hit game, the game may start when the game ball passes through the first pass area, or during the big hit game, the game ball may pass through the first pass area. It may not be implemented in some cases.

  Also, the second winning effect display may be one that can be started only when the gaming ball wins the second variable winning means during the execution of the big hit game, or during the execution of the big hit game, It may also be possible to start the game other than when the game ball wins the second variable winning means. The second winning effect display may be started when the gaming ball wins the second variable winning means during the execution of the big hit game, or may be started during the execution of the big hit game. The game may not start when the game ball wins the second variable winning means.

  Further, the second winning effect display may be such that it can be started only when the game ball has passed through the first passing area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state. Then, after the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to start the game other than when the game ball passes the first passage area. Further, the second winning effect display may be such that the second variable winning means is always started when the game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state. After the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state, the game may not start when the game ball passes through the first passage area.

  The display mode of the first prize effect display and the display mode of the second prize effect display may be the same or different.

Further, "the second variable winning means is a variable winning means in which the first variable winning means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy ball entry state [see, for example, FIG. As shown, while the special power combination 1 is operating, the special power combination 2 is in an inactive state.],
The first variable prize means is a variable prize means in which the second variable prize means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy entry state [for example, as shown in FIG. While the special electric part 2 is operating, the special electric part 1 is in the non-operating state.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the first variable prize means is in the closed state and the second variable prize means is in the open state, if the first variable prize means is in the first valid period, the first variable prize means can be changed to the first variable prize means. By winning, it is displayed that the second variable winning means has actually been won, so that the player may be able to feel a sense of value.

Also, “Sound output means [for example, speaker 120],
Counting means that can start counting the number of game balls that have won the second variable prize means when the second variable prize means changes to the easy-to-ball state [for example, the first sub-controller 400 Sub-control unit prize counter provided in the RAM 408 of the
With
The second variable winning means changes to the difficult ball entry state when the second maximum winning number (for example, 10) of game balls is won after the easy ball entry state is entered. Variable winning means to
After the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state, even if a game ball has passed through the first passage area, the counting means enters the second variable winning means. [For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), when the passage of the game ball to the first count switch SW1 is detected after the next round is started, the second ball is counted. It is counted by the sub-control unit winning counter which has been counted as the winning number display related to the variable winning opening 235],
When the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means may output a third over-winning sound [for example, FIG. As shown in ′), when the value of the sub-control unit winning counter becomes “11” and exceeds the maximum winning number (when an apparent over winning occurs), an over winning sound is output from the speaker 120. You. ],
A game ball characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the maximum number of wins in the second variable prize means, including the number of gaming balls that have won prizes in the first variable prize means after the second variable prize means has opened, is maximum. When an over-winning prize occurs in excess of the number, a third over-winning sound is output, so that the player may be able to feel a sense of value.

  Further, according to this gaming table, even if the first variable winning means is won after the second variable winning means is opened, it is not determined that an over winning has occurred, and the over winning sound is not output. In some cases, the first variable prize means and the second variable prize means can be watched closely.

  Here, the counting means may be capable of starting counting only the number of game balls that have won the second variable prize means when the second variable prize means changes to the easy ball entry state. Then, when the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to start anything other than counting the number of game balls which have won the second variable winning means. The counting means may be capable of starting counting the number of game balls that have won the second variable prize means only when the second variable prize means has changed to the easy ball entry state. In addition to the case where the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state, it may be possible to start other than counting the number of game balls which have won the second variable winning means. Further, the counting means may always start counting the number of gaming balls that have won the second variable prize means when the second variable prize means changes to the easy-to-ball state, When the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter-ball state, the counting of the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning means may not be started.

  In addition, when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means may always output the third over-winning sound, or the number of game balls may be counted by the counting means. When the number of game balls exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means may not output the third over-winning sound.

Further, “first control means [for example, main control unit 300],
A second control unit [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] capable of executing the control of the sound output unit,
With
The first control means is capable of transmitting first passage information [for example, a special winning opening winning command] to the second control means when a game ball passes through the first passage area. And
The first control means is capable of transmitting second pass information [for example, a special winning opening winning command] to the second control means when a game ball wins in the second variable winning means. Means,
The second control unit is a control unit having a third storage area [for example, a sub control unit winning counter in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400],
The counting means is means for counting the number of times the second control means has received the second passage information after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The counting means is means for counting the number of times the first pass information has been received, after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area,
The second control means outputs the sound output when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number [for example, 10 pieces]. (For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (j '), the value of the sub control unit winning counter indicates "11"). If an over-winning prize occurs, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning means and the number of game balls that have won the second variable winning means are managed in one storage area, thereby simplifying the processing. May be able to.

  According to this gaming table, the first variable winning means is in the closed state, and even if the second variable winning means is in the open state, it is difficult to enter the ball during the first validity period. In some cases, an unnatural effect can be performed in relation to the game ball that has won the first variable winning means, and the player can concentrate on the game in some cases.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of executing only control of the sound output means, or may be capable of executing control other than control of the sound output means. In addition, the second control means may always execute the control of the sound output means, or may not execute the control of the sound output means.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information only to the second control means when the game ball passes through the first passage area, When the game ball passes through the passing area, the first passing information may be transmitted to other than the second control means. Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the first passage information to the second control means only when the game ball has passed through the first passage area, In addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the passing area, the first passing information may be transmitted to the second control means. Further, the first control means may be configured to always transmit the first passage information to the second control means when the game ball passes through the first passage area, or the first passage When the game ball passes through the area, the first passage information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the second passage information only to the second control means when the game ball has won the second variable winning means, When the game ball wins the variable winning means, the second passing information may be transmitted to other than the second control means. Also, the first control means may be capable of transmitting the second passage information to the second control means only when the game ball has won the second variable winning means, The second pass information may be transmitted to the second control means in addition to the case where the game ball wins the variable winning means. Further, the first control means may be configured to always transmit the second passage information to the second control means when the game ball wins the second variable winning means, When a game ball wins the variable winning means, the second passage information may not be transmitted to the second control means.

  The second control means may store the count result of the counting means only in the third storage area, or may store the count result of the counting means in an area other than the third storage area. It may be possible. Further, the second control means may always store the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area, or may not store the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area. Is also good.

  Further, the second control means, when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, outputs the third over-winning sound to the sound output means. It may be possible to execute only the control for outputting, or if the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means Control other than the control for outputting the third over-winning sound may be executable. Also, the second control means outputs the third over-winning sound to the sound output means only when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. May be executable, or in cases other than when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, The sound output means may be capable of executing control for outputting the third over-winning sound. In addition, when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, control for causing the sound output means to output the third over-winning sound is always executed. The third over-winning sound may be output to the sound output unit when the value indicating the counting result of the counting unit stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. There may be a case where the control to make it not be performed.

  Further, the counting means may be capable of starting counting the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area when the first variable winning means has changed to an easy-to-enter state. In this case, when the game ball has passed through the first passage area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state, the counting means causes the game ball to pass through the first passage area. It may be counted as passed game balls. Then, the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means and the number of game balls that have passed through the first passing area after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state are described. A third over-winning sound may be output when the total exceeds the second maximum winning number.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Sound output means [for example, speaker 120];
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234 (second variable winning opening 235)];
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235 (first variable winning opening 234)],
A first passage area [for example, a first passage area] through which game balls entering the first attacker can pass;
A second passage area [e.g., a second passage area] through which game balls entering the second attacker can pass;
Game control means [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] capable of executing a big hit game,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
The first attacker is closed when the first maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls pass through the first passage area after being opened. Attacker,
After the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, until the first valid period [for example, the time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer (for example, 3 seconds)] elapses, It is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid,
The second attacker is configured to, when the second maximum winning number [for example, 10] game balls pass through the second passing area after the opening state, enter the closed state. Is an attacker that changes to
During the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. Is activated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state, and when the special electric utility 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.],
After the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the first state until the first validity period elapses. The first over-winning sound may be output by the sound output means by passing through the passing area [for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the prize is awarded after the second round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
The display means is capable of displaying a display that changes according to the total number of game balls passing through the first passage area and game balls passing through the second passage area during execution of the big hit game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 34, by displaying the total winning number display, it is possible to specify the number of winning balls obtained by winning the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present. Display in a simple manner],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

In addition, “the period in which the first attacker is in the open state is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid [for example, as shown in FIG. When the special power combination 1 is activated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state, and when the special power combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "by passing the first maximum number of game balls through the first passage area, the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, then the second attacker is the second attacker Even after changing to the open state, during the period of the first valid period, the game output ball passes through the first passage area, so that the sound output means causes the first over-winning. Is configured to output sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, the "first over-winning sound is generated in the first passage area after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the first validity period elapses. Is an over-winning sound that can be output when the number of game balls passing through exceeds the first maximum winning number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "a second validity period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 2 winning detection timer] has elapsed since the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state." Up to, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area is configured to be effective,
After the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the first attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second state until the second validity period elapses. The second over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit by passing through the passing area [for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k), the second variable winning opening 235 in the second round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the prize wins after the third round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the “second over-winning sound” means that the second passage area is changed from the open state to the closed state until the second validity period elapses. Is an over-winning sound that can be output when the number of game balls passing through exceeds the second maximum winning number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second over-winning sound is a game ball that has passed through the second passage area from when the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state until the second validity period has elapsed. It may be one that can be output only when the number exceeds the second maximum winning number, or from the time when the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the second validity period elapses. In the meantime, it may be possible to output a game ball other than when the number of game balls passing through the second passage area exceeds the second maximum winning number. Also, the second over-winning sound is the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area between the time when the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state and the time when the second valid period has elapsed. May be output whenever the second maximum winning number is exceeded, or between the time when the second validity period elapses after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. Alternatively, when the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, no output may be made.

In addition, "the display means changes the display according to the number of game balls passing through the first pass area (hereinafter," first pass display [for example, the first round shown in FIG. , Or the number of winnings displayed in the upper attacker column shown in FIG. 35] ").
The display means may be a display that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the second pass area (hereinafter referred to as a “second pass display [for example, the winning number in the second round shown in FIG. Display or a winning number display displayed in the lower attacker column shown in FIG. 35]]).
The display means is a means that can start displaying the first pass display when the first attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIG. 33 (b) and FIG. 35 (b). As shown, when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, a winning number display corresponding to the number of winning balls in the first variable winning opening 234 is started],
The display unit is a unit that can start displaying the second passage display when the second attacker is in the open state [for example, in FIG. 33 (f) and FIG. 35 (f). As shown, when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the display of the winning number corresponding to the number of winning balls in the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the display means switches the display to the first pass display when the second attacker is in the open state after the first attacker is in the closed state from the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), at the timing when the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, the winning number display is cleared and “0” is displayed. And the winning number display is changed from the display corresponding to the winning number to the first variable winning opening 234 to the display corresponding to the winning ball number to the second variable winning opening 235],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, the display means switches to the second passage display when the first attacker is in the open state after the second attacker is in the closed state from the open state. [For example, at the timing when the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display is cleared to “0”, and the winning number display is changed to the second variable winning display. The display corresponding to the winning number in the winning opening 235 is changed to the display corresponding to the winning ball number in the first variable winning opening 234],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the display means displays the first passage display when the second attacker is in the open state after the first attacker is in the closed state from the open state. This is a means for starting the display of the second pass display while keeping the state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), even if the second variable winning opening 235 is opened, it corresponds to the first variable winning opening 234. The winning number display is maintained at “10” indicating that 10 winnings have been achieved, and the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, the display means displays the second passage display when the first attacker is in the open state after the second attacker is in the closed state from the open state. This is a means for starting the display of the first pass display while keeping the same. [For example, even if the first variable winning opening 234 is opened, the winning number display corresponding to the second variable winning opening 235 is maintained, and The display of the number of winnings corresponding to one variable winning opening 234 is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. Indicates that the special electric part 2 is inactive.],
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, “first control means [for example, main control unit 300],
A second control unit [for example, a first sub-control unit 400] capable of executing the control of the sound output unit,
With
The first control means can transmit first passage information [for example, a special winning opening winning command] to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first passage area. Control means,
The second control unit is a control unit having a first storage area [for example, the sub-control unit winning counter 1 in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400],
The second control means controls the number of times the first pass information is received (hereinafter, referred to as “first pass Control means) capable of counting the number of times.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage times in the first storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means to the first output Control means capable of executing control to output an over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, there is provided “first passage detection means [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2)] capable of detecting a game ball passing through the first passage area,
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state when the first passage detection means detects the passage of the first maximum winning number of game balls after being in the open state. Yes,
The first passer is configured to be able to detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detecting means until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the first count switch SW1 is maintained in an effective state until the period set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer elapses.]
After the first attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker has changed to the open state, the first passage detection means until the first validity period elapses. When the passing of a game ball is detected by the above, the first over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit [for example, as shown in FIG. After the eleventh game ball that has entered the one variable winning opening 234 starts the second round, a winning is made before the period set by the special power 1 winning detection timer elapses, and the over winning sound is generated by the speaker 120. Output from
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, when the second attacker is in the closed state during the first valid period [for example, in FIG. 29, a period indicated by tb04 to tb06], the game ball passes through the first passage. By passing through the area, there is a case where the first over-winning sound is output by the sound output means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the second attacker is in the closed state during the first valid period, the game output ball passes through the first passage area, so that the first over-winning sound is always generated by the sound output means. It may be output, or, when the second attacker is in the closed state during the first valid period, the game ball passes through the first passage area, so that the sound output means makes the first overrun. A winning sound may not be output in some cases.

In the above description,
"Information means capable of executing a plurality of types of information [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc.] When,
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234, 234a (second variable winning opening 235, 235a) or the like] that can be changed between an open state and a closed state;
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, 235a (first variable winning opening 234, 234a) or the like] that can be changed between the open state and the closed state;
A first passage area [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2) or the like] through which a game ball entering the first attacker can pass;
A second passage area [for example, a second count switch SW2 (first count switch SW1) or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass;
A third pass area [for example, a V pass switch SW3 or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
A first valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer or the like] started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. Until the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is configured to be effective,
At least during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. When the special power combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.
The third passage area is a passage area different from the second passage area,
During the execution of the big hit game, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third pass area, a probable change state can be started after the end of the big hit game [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 49 and passing through the V pass switch SW3 in the fifteenth round, the state changes to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the first passage area (hereinafter, “first notification [for example, FIG. 49 (f), FIG. 52 ( c3), FIGS. 53 (i), 55 (e), 55 (h), 56 (f), 56 (g), 58 (e), 59, 61 (h), 63 ( e), an over-winning effect shown in FIG. 56 (k), a winning effect shown in FIGS. 39, 40, 63 (c) and 63 (d), etc.]). And
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, “second notification”). [For example, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 55, by displaying the total winning number display or the acquired winning ball number display, the winning in the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present. 53 (f) to 53 (j) to display the total number of winning prize balls, thereby starting the first big hit game. From the present to the present, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the variable winning openings 234a and 235a is displayed in a manner that can be specified]]).
The first notification may be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and FIG. 55 (e), the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 (234a) in the first round is the second round. Is started after the start of the game, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or, as shown in FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the 14th round. The ball wins in the inter-round interval after the end of the first round, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or the second variable winning opening in the fifteenth round as shown in FIG. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball 35a wins during the execution of the jackpot / big hit end effect, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 63, the first variable winning opening in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the ball 234a wins after the second round starts, and a winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notification means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic in the notification means can be realized.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed during a period in which the first valid period and the open state of the second attacker are overlapped. In some cases, the player can easily recognize that the ball has been effective.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed in a state where the player can enter the third passage area, so that the player passes the game ball to the third passage area and In some cases, the passage of a game ball to the passage area can be clearly distinguished and recognized.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification and the second notification, or may be capable of executing notification other than the first notification and the second notification. . Further, the notification means may always execute the first notification and the second notification, or may not execute at least one of the first notification and the second notification.

  Further, the first attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the first attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the second attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the second attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the first passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the first attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the first attacker may pass. It may be something. Further, the first passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the first attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the first attacker. .

  Further, the second passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may pass. It may be something. Also, the second passage area may be one in which game balls that have entered the second attacker must pass, or may be that game balls that have entered the second attacker do not pass. .

  Further, the third passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may pass. It may be something. Further, the third passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the second attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the second attacker. .

  Also, only until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the first valid period elapses, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is made valid. It may be configured, and other than until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area may be performed. It may be configured to be valid. Also, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is always valid until the first valid period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. And the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is not valid until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  Also, only during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be valid, or during the period when the second attacker is in the open state. In other periods, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area may be configured to be valid. Further, during the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be always valid, or the period in which the second attacker is in the open state In, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may not be valid.

  Also, during the execution of the jackpot game, only when the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third passage area, it may be configured such that the probability change state can be started after the end of the jackpot game, During the execution of the big hit game, the game ball that has entered the second attacker may be configured to be able to start the certain change state after the big hit game ends, other than when the game ball passes through the third passage area. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game, if the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third passage area, it may be configured such that the probability change state always starts after the end of the jackpot game, During the execution of the game, even if the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third passage area, the probability change state may not be started after the end of the big hit game.

  In addition, the first notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the first passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be used. In addition, the first notification may always notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be.

  In addition, the second notification may be changed only in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area. It may be changeable in accordance with the number of game balls passing through the area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area. In addition, the second notification may be necessarily changed according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area, or the first passage area It may not be changed according to the number of at least one of the game balls that have passed through and the game balls that have passed through the second passage area.

  Further, the first notification can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. It is also possible that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker is closed. Good. In addition, the first notification may be started when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if it passes through the first passage area until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the first notification is a concept that includes an over-prize notification and a prize notification, such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of the attacker detects the over-prize notification. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the first notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  In addition, the second notification may be a winning number display indicating a winning number of each of the first attacker and the second attacker, or a winning number of the first attacker and a winning of the second attacker. It may be a single winning number display in which the numbers are summarized. Further, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the respective prizes of the first attacker and the second attacker may be displayed, or a prize paid out in accordance with the prize in the first attacker. One acquired prize ball number display that summarizes the number of spheres and the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the second attacker may be used.

  Also, the over-prize notification of the first attacker may be performed even when the second attacker is open, but the notification of the first attacker may not be performed when the second attacker is open. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification performed by winning the first attacker and the notification performed by winning the second attacker may be the same or different.

  The probability change state is a state in which the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the non-probability change state.

In addition, "one notification of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that the game ball has passed through the third passage area (hereinafter," third notification [for example, FIG. 48 (m), 49 (f), which is a notification of “V” or the like indicating that the probability change acquisition has been finalized] ”).
The third notification is a notification that may be started when the game ball passes through the third passage area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (m) and 49 (f), the V passing When the signal passes through the switch SW3, "V" indicating that the probability change has been acquired is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when part or all of the first notification overlaps with part or all of the third notification, the player may be able to prevent both notifications from being overlooked. .

  Also, according to this gaming table, a player who has been blessed with respect to each of the two notifications, the first notification and the third notification, wants to see such notification again. In some cases, the player may be able to concentrate on the game, for example, by attaching a mark.

  Here, the third notification may be started only when the game ball has passed through the third passage area, or may be started in addition to when the game ball has passed through the third passage area. May be done. Further, the third notification may be always started when the game ball passes through the third passage area, or may not be started even when the game ball passes through the third passage area. There may be.

Also, a movable means [for example, movable to a first position [for example, a position to be in a closed state shown in FIG. 46A]] and a second position [for example, a position to be in an open state] V shutter 2352a shown in FIG.
The third pass area is a pass area through which a game ball that has passed through the second pass area can pass,
The first position is a position where a game ball that has passed through the second passage area is prevented from passing through the third passage area [for example, the V shutter 2352a is moved forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a. When it is in the advanced state (closed state), entry of the game ball into the V passage 2340g is prevented, etc.]
The second position is a position where a game ball that has passed through the second passage area is allowed to pass through the third passage area [for example, the V shutter 2352a is positioned rearward with respect to the mounting base 2340a. When in the retracted state (open state), the entry of the game ball into the V passage 2340g is permitted, etc.],
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position during a period in which the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 2 is activated, the variable operating range solenoid SOL3 is driven to open the V shutter 2352a, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the passage of the game ball to the third passage area can be controlled, and the game performance may be improved.

  Here, the movable means may be movable only to the first position and the second position, or may be movable other than the first position and the second position. Is also good. In addition, the movable means may always move to the first position and the second position, or may not move to the first position and the second position.

  The third passage area may be such that only game balls that have passed through the second passage area can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have passed through the second passage area may also pass. It may be something. Also, the third pass area may be a game ball that has passed through the second pass area without fail, or a game ball that has passed through the second pass area may not pass. .

  Also, only during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the movable means may be configured to move from the first position to the second position, or other than during the period when the second attacker is in the open state. During the period, the movable means may be configured to move from the first position to the second position. Further, in the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the movable means may be configured to always move from the first position to the second position, or in the period in which the second attacker is in the open state. Alternatively, the movable means may not move from the first position to the second position.

  It should be noted that a fifth passage area [for example, an area provided with a discharge ball detection switch SW4 or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass is provided, and the fifth passage area is larger than the movable means. A region located on the downstream side, and is configured such that when the movable means is in the first position [for example, in a closed state or the like], game balls that have passed through the second passage region cannot enter the third passage region. When the movable means is in the first position [for example, in the closed state or the like], the game ball that has passed through the second passage area may enter the fifth passage area.

  Further, the control means is means for performing control to move the movable means from the first position to the second position when the moving condition is satisfied. The requirement may include a change from the closed state to the open state.

Also, "the big hit game is composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 15 rounds and the like]
One of the plurality of rounds is a first round [for example, 14 rounds or the like],
One round of the plurality of rounds is a second round [for example, 15 rounds or the like],
One of the plurality of rounds is a third round [for example, one or more of the first to thirteenth rounds],
The first round is a round started after the third round,
The second round is a round started after the first round,
The first round is a round in which the second attacker is in the open state,
The second round is a round in which the second attacker is in the open state,
The third round is a round in which the first attacker is in the open state,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
According to this gaming table, since there are a plurality of rounds in which the second attacker is in the open state, the chances of passing through the third passage area increase, and the playability may be improved.

  Here, the jackpot game may be composed of only the first round, the second round, and the third round, and includes rounds other than the first round, the second round, and the third round. It may be configured. In addition, the jackpot game may necessarily include the first round, the second round, and the third round, or any one of the first round, the second round, and the third round. The above may not be included in some cases.

  In addition, the first round may be a round started after the third round, or may be a round started after the third round with another round interposed.

  In addition, the second round may be a round started after the first round, or may be a round started after the first round across other rounds.

  Further, the first round may be a round that can be started only after the third round, or may be a round that can be started other than after the third round. Also, the first round may be a round that always starts after the third round, or may not start after the third round.

  In addition, the second round may be a round that can be started only after the first round, or may be a round that can be started other than after the first round. The second round may be a round that always starts after the first round, or may not start after the first round.

Also, "the third pass area is a pass area configured to be able to enter in at least one of the first round and the second round,
A gaming table characterized by the following. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 54, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in the 14th and 15th rounds, and there is a period in which the V shutter 2352a is in the open state in any of the rounds.]
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to have a game property as to whether the game can pass through the third passage area in one of the first round and the second round, and it is possible to improve interest. There are cases.

  Here, the third passage area may be configured to be able to enter in any of the first round and the second round, and may be configured to be in the first round and the second round. You may be comprised so that it can enter only in one round.

  In addition, the third passage area may be configured to be able to enter only in at least one of the first round and the second round, and other than the first round and the second round You may be comprised so that it can enter also in a round. Further, the third passage area may be configured to be able to enter without fail in at least one of the first round and the second round, or may be configured to be able to enter the first round and the second round. It may not be possible to enter in at least one round.

  The third passage area may be configured to be able to enter in three or more rounds.

  Also, the first attacker and the second attacker may be configured to be opened in a predetermined order, for example, the first attacker and the second attacker are alternately opened. Alternatively, they may be opened continuously.

In addition, a game control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 and the like] is provided,
The game control means is a means capable of executing the control of the big hit game (for example, each processing related to the big hit game shown in FIGS. 13 to 19),
The game control means determines whether the probability change start condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit game is being executed, a game ball passes through the V passing switch SW3 during the effective period of the probability change operation area, and then the big hit game ends). Means for initiating the probable change state,
The requirement for satisfying the certainty start condition is a requirement including that a game ball has passed through the third passage area during execution of the control of the big hit game by the game control means.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player has an incentive to pass the game ball to the third passage area during the execution of the big hit game, so that the interest of the game may be improved.

  Here, the game control means may be capable of executing only the control of the big hit game, or may be capable of executing the control other than the control of the big hit game. Further, the game control means may always execute the control of the big hit game, or may not execute the control of the big hit game.

  The game control means may be capable of starting the probable change state only when the probable change start condition is satisfied, or may be capable of starting the probable change state other than when the probable change start condition is satisfied. May be. Further, the game control means may always start the probable change state when the probable change start condition is satisfied, or may not start the probable change state when the probable change start condition is satisfied. .

In addition, "the first attacker is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is also valid during the period in which the first attacker is in the open state [see, for example, FIG. 29 and FIG. Thus, when the special power combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first attacker is in the open state, it may be possible to surely detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Is in the non-operating state during the operation of.
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Indicates that the special electrician 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “a second validity period that is started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by a special power 2 winning detection timer)] Until elapse, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, a “fourth notification [for example, FIG. 32 (k), FIG. 52 ( c3), a winning effect (over-winning effect) shown in FIG. 55 (h) and FIG. 59 (b)]]).
The fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second validity period elapses after the second attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k) and FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 (235a) is performing the inter-round interval, After the next round is started, a prize is won, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fourth notification may be performed during a period in which the second valid period and the open state of the first attacker overlap, so that the game balls that have passed through the second passage area are In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been effective.

  Here, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid only until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the second valid period elapses. Or the passage of the game ball to the second passage area other than until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. May be configured to be valid. In addition, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is always valid until the second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state elapses. And the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is not valid until a second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  In addition, the fourth notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be used. In addition, the fourth notification may always notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be.

  Further, the fourth notification can be started only when the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. It may be that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed and the second attacker is closed. Good. Further, the fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the fourth notification is a concept that includes notification of an over-winning prize and a prize notification such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of an attacker detects the winning. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the fourth notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  Further, the fourth notification may be the same notification mode as the first notification. In this case, for example, the same processing is performed for the first notification and the fourth notification, or the processing for notifying the prize to the first attacker and the prize to the second attacker is performed separately. However, the same data may be used. This may allow the player to be notified that either the first attacker has won or the second attacker has won.

In addition, "the notifying means includes a plurality of notifying means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc. ] Means constituted by
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a first notification means [for example, speaker 120 or the like],
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The first notification is notification performed by the first notification unit,
The second notification is notification performed by the second notification unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification and the second notification are performed by different notification means, so that the first notification and the second notification can be easily distinguished from each other, and the player can concentrate on the game. May be possible.

  Here, the plurality of notifying units may be configured by only the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit, or may further include notifying units other than the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit. May be. Further, the plurality of notifying means may necessarily include the first notifying means and the second notifying means, and may include at least one of the first notifying means and the second notifying means. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification may be performed only by the first notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the first notification means. The first notification may be always performed by the first notification unit, or may not be performed by the first notification unit.

  Further, the second notification may be performed only by the second notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the second notification means. Also, the second notification may be always performed by the second notification unit, or may not be performed by the second notification unit.

  Here, the first notification means is one or a plurality of notification means of sound output means, light emitting means, effect-moving means (such as an accessory), display means, and the like, and the second notification means Is one or a plurality of notifying means of a display means, a light emitting means, an effect movable means (such as an accessory), a sound output means and the like. Further, the first notification means and the second notification means may be the same type of means, for example, the relationship between the main display means and the sub display means, the light emitting means for the game frame and the game board. Relationship between the light emitting means, relationship between the light emitting means provided on the first accessory and the light emitting means provided around the center accessory, relationship between the speaker outputting the high frequency range and the speaker outputting the low frequency range, etc. Can be considered.

  The first notification may be, for example, notification performed by one notification unit, such as an over-prize notification by a sound output unit, or may be performed by an over-winning sound by a sound output unit and an over-winning display by a display unit. It may be a notification performed by a plurality of notification means, such as an over-prize effect.

  It goes without saying that the above is similarly applicable to the second notification.

  Further, the second notification may be performed by the first notification unit, but the second notification may not be performed.

  In addition, the first notification may be performed by the second notification unit, but the first notification may not be performed.

In addition, “the first notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball entering the first attacker passing through the first passage area [for example, FIG. 63 ( c) and the winning sounds shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has won.

In addition, "the first notification is an over-prize notification [for example, FIG. 52 (c3), FIG. 53 (i), FIG. 55 (e), FIG. 55 (h), FIG. 56 (k). , Over sound shown in FIG. 59 and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has over-winned.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Information means capable of executing a plurality of types of information [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc.] When,
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234, 234a (second variable winning opening 235, 235a) or the like] that can be changed between an open state and a closed state;
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, 235a (first variable winning opening 234, 234a) or the like] that can be changed between the open state and the closed state;
A first passage area [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2) or the like] through which a game ball entering the first attacker can pass;
A second passage area [for example, a second count switch SW2 (first count switch SW1) or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
A first valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer or the like] started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. Until the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is configured to be effective,
At least during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. When the special power combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the first passage area (hereinafter, “first notification [for example, FIG. 49 (f), FIG. 52 ( c3), FIGS. 53 (i), 55 (e), 55 (h), 56 (f), 56 (g), 58 (e), 59, 61 (h), 63 ( e), an over-winning effect shown in FIG. 56 (k), a winning effect shown in FIGS. 39, 40, 63 (c) and 63 (d), etc.]). And
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, “second notification”). [For example, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 55, by displaying the total winning number display or the acquired winning ball number display, the winning in the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present. 53 (f) to 53 (j) to display the total number of winning prize balls, thereby starting the first big hit game. From the present to the present, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the variable winning openings 234a and 235a is displayed in a manner that can be specified]]).
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification corresponding to the number of consecutive holidays (hereinafter, “relief notification [for example, the consecutive holidays shown in FIG. 49, FIG. 55, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, FIG. A display of the number of times, a background image celebrating the jackpot specific to the jackpot of the tenth villa shown in FIG. 56 (a) and a character display of “celebration ten villas” celebrating the jackpot of the tenth villa, FIG. 56 (i) Or an effect performed only in the jackpot game of ten or more villas shown in FIG. 57 (f)]]).
The first notification may be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and FIG. 55 (e), the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 (234a) in the first round is the second round. Is started after the start of the game, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or, as shown in FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the 14th round. The ball wins in the inter-round interval after the end of the first round, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or the second variable winning opening in the fifteenth round as shown in FIG. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball 35a wins during the execution of the jackpot / big hit end effect, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 63, the first variable winning opening in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the ball 234a wins after the second round starts, and a winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notification means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic in the notification means can be realized.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed during a period in which the first valid period and the open state of the second attacker are overlapped. In some cases, the player can easily recognize that the ball has been effective.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed in a state where the extended-villa notification is performed, so that the player may be blessed and the interest of the player may be further improved. is there.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification, the second notification, and the notification of the extended holiday, or may execute the notification other than the first notification, the second notification, and the notification of the extended holiday. It may be possible. In addition, the notification means may be configured to always execute the first notification, the second notification, and the consecutive announcement, or at least one of the first notification, the second notification, and the consecutive announcement. May not be performed.

  Further, the first attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the first attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the second attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the second attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the first passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the first attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the first attacker may pass. It may be something. Further, the first passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the first attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the first attacker. .

  Further, the second passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may pass. It may be something. Also, the second passage area may be one in which game balls that have entered the second attacker must pass, or may be that game balls that have entered the second attacker do not pass. .

  Also, only until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the first valid period elapses, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is made valid. It may be configured, and other than until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area may be performed. It may be configured to be valid. Also, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is always valid until the first valid period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. And the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is not valid until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  Also, only during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be valid, or during the period when the second attacker is in the open state. In other periods, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area may be configured to be valid. Further, during the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be always valid, or the period in which the second attacker is in the open state In, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may not be valid.

  In addition, the first notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the first passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be used. In addition, the first notification may always notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be.

  In addition, the second notification may be changed only in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area. It may be changeable in accordance with the number of game balls passing through the area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area. In addition, the second notification may be necessarily changed according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area, or the first passage area It may not be changed according to the number of at least one of the game balls that have passed through and the game balls that have passed through the second passage area.

  Further, the extended-village notification may be a notification based on only the number of consecutive villas, or may be a notification other than the notification based on the number of consecutive villas. In addition, the notification of the number of extended holidays may be one that always performs notification in accordance with the number of consecutive holidays, or the notification that corresponds to the number of consecutive holidays may not be performed.

  Further, the first notification can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. It is also possible that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker is closed. Good. In addition, the first notification may be started when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if it passes through the first passage area until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the first notification is a concept that includes an over-prize notification and a prize notification, such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of the attacker detects the over-prize notification. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the first notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  In addition, the second notification may be a winning number display indicating a winning number of each of the first attacker and the second attacker, or a winning number of the first attacker and a winning of the second attacker. It may be a single winning number display in which the numbers are summarized. Further, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the respective prizes of the first attacker and the second attacker may be displayed, or a prize paid out in accordance with the prize in the first attacker. One acquired prize ball number display that summarizes the number of spheres and the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the second attacker may be used.

  Also, the over-prize notification of the first attacker may be performed even when the second attacker is open, but the notification of the first attacker may not be performed when the second attacker is open. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification performed by winning the first attacker and the notification performed by winning the second attacker may be the same or different.

  The probability change state is a state in which the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the non-probability change state.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game composed of a plurality of rounds [for example, 15 rounds or the like]
It is configured such that the extended-shelf notification is notified during a period from the start of the round to the end thereof [for example, FIG. 52 (a) to FIG. 52 (d) and FIG. 55 (b) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (G) and FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (f), the number of consecutive rooms is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at least from the start to the end of the round. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of extended games may be easily confirmed during the big hit game.

  Note that, in addition to the period from the start to the end of the round, the notification of the extended home may be continuously performed during the interval between rounds in which the round ends and the transition is made. Further, during the interval between rounds, it may be arranged not to perform the notification of the consecutive holidays.

Also, "the extended casino notification is information that may be started in a jackpot game in which the number of consecutive villas is the first number of times (for example, 10 times) [for example, FIG. 56 (a) and FIG. As shown in (i) and FIG. 57 (f), a display celebrating a jackpot specific to the jackpot of the tenth villa is performed when the jackpot is the tenth villa.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to easily recognize that the number of extended games is the first number.

  Here, the extended-village notification may be one that may be started only in the big hit game in which the number of consecutive holidays is the first number, or may be other than the big hit game in which the number of consecutive holidays is the first number. May also be started. In addition, the extended holiday notification may be always started in the big hit game in which the number of extended holidays is the first number, or may not be started in the big hit game in which the number of extended holidays is the first number. You may.

  It should be noted that, in a jackpot game in which the number of consecutive villas is equal to or greater than the first number, the consecutive villa notification may be performed.

  In addition, the consecutive villa notification can be notified during a round in the big hit game, during the execution of the big hit start effect, during the big hit end effect, and the like.

  In addition, the extended-game notification may be notified in a big hit game in which the number of extended games is a multiple (for example, 20, 30,...) Of the first number (for example, 10).

In addition, the “announcement is a notification that is not started in a jackpot game in which the number of extended holidays is a second number [for example, 1 to 9 times],
The second number is a different number from the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the willingness of the player to play the first number of jackpot games by giving a rare value to the consecutive play announcement.

Also, "the number of consecutive villas is a number that does not include at least the number of small hits,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of times of extended play at the big hit can be easily recognized in some cases.

  Note that a jackpot in which it is not expected to acquire a ball, such as a latent probability change (latent probability) or a sudden probability change (sudden probability), may not be counted in the number of extended games.

  In addition, only a specific jackpot (for example, a 15-round jackpot) is counted, and other jackpots (for example, a 5-round jackpot, a 2-round jackpot, or a jackpot in which it is not expected to obtain a ball) are not counted in the number of extended games. It may be.

In addition, "the first attacker is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is also valid during the period in which the first attacker is in the open state [see, for example, FIG. 29 and FIG. Thus, when the special power combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first attacker is in the open state, it may be possible to surely detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Is in the non-operating state during the operation of.
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Indicates that the special electrician 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “a second validity period that is started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by a special power 2 winning detection timer)] Until elapse, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, a “fourth notification [for example, FIG. 32 (k), FIG. 52 ( c3), a winning effect (over-winning effect) shown in FIG. 55 (h) and FIG. 59 (b)]]).
The fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second validity period elapses after the second attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k) and FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 (235a) is performing the inter-round interval, After the next round is started, a prize is won, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fourth notification may be performed during a period in which the second valid period and the open state of the first attacker overlap, so that the game balls that have passed through the second passage area are In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been effective.

  Here, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid only until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the second valid period elapses. Or the passage of the game ball to the second passage area other than until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. May be configured to be valid. In addition, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is always valid until the second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state elapses. And the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is not valid until a second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  In addition, the fourth notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be used. In addition, the fourth notification may always notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be.

  Further, the fourth notification can be started only when the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. It may be that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed and the second attacker is closed. Good. Further, the fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the fourth notification is a concept that includes notification of an over-winning prize and a prize notification such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of an attacker detects the winning. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the fourth notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  Further, the fourth notification may be the same notification mode as the first notification. In this case, for example, the same processing is performed for the first notification and the fourth notification, or the processing for notifying the prize to the first attacker and the prize to the second attacker is performed separately. However, the same data may be used. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that either the first attacker has won or the second attacker has won.

In addition, "the notifying means includes a plurality of notifying means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc. ] Means constituted by
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a first notification means [for example, speaker 120 or the like],
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The first notification is notification performed by the first notification unit,
The second notification is notification performed by the second notification unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification and the second notification are performed by different notification means, so that the first notification and the second notification can be easily distinguished from each other, and the player can concentrate on the game. May be possible.

  Here, the plurality of notifying units may be configured by only the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit, or may further include notifying units other than the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit. May be. Further, the plurality of notifying means may necessarily include the first notifying means and the second notifying means, and may include at least one of the first notifying means and the second notifying means. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification may be performed only by the first notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the first notification means. The first notification may be always performed by the first notification unit, or may not be performed by the first notification unit.

  Further, the second notification may be performed only by the second notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the second notification means. Also, the second notification may be always performed by the second notification unit, or may not be performed by the second notification unit.

  Here, the first notification means is one or a plurality of notification means of sound output means, light emitting means, effect-moving means (such as an accessory), display means, and the like, and the second notification means Is one or a plurality of notifying means of a display means, a light emitting means, an effect movable means (such as an accessory), a sound output means and the like. Further, the first notification means and the second notification means may be the same type of means, for example, the relationship between the main display means and the sub display means, the light emitting means for the game frame and the game board. Relationship between the light emitting means, relationship between the light emitting means provided on the first accessory and the light emitting means provided around the center accessory, relationship between the speaker outputting the high frequency range and the speaker outputting the low frequency range, etc. Can be considered.

  The first notification may be, for example, notification performed by one notification unit, such as an over-prize notification by a sound output unit, or may be performed by an over-winning sound by a sound output unit and an over-winning display by a display unit. It may be a notification performed by a plurality of notification means, such as an over-prize effect.

  It goes without saying that the above is similarly applicable to the second notification.

  Further, the second notification may be performed by the first notification unit, but the second notification may not be performed.

  In addition, the first notification may be performed by the second notification unit, but the first notification may not be performed.

In addition, “the first notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball entering the first attacker passing through the first passage area [for example, FIG. 63 ( c) and the winning sounds shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has won.

In addition, "the first notification is an over-prize notification [for example, FIG. 52 (c3), FIG. 53 (i), FIG. 55 (e), FIG. 55 (h), FIG. 56 (k). , Over sound shown in FIG. 59 and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has over-winned.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Information means capable of executing a plurality of types of information [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc.] When,
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234, 234a (second variable winning opening 235, 235a) or the like] that can be changed between an open state and a closed state;
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, 235a (first variable winning opening 234, 234a) or the like] that can be changed between the open state and the closed state;
A first passage area [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2) or the like] through which a game ball entering the first attacker can pass;
A second passage area [for example, a second count switch SW2 (first count switch SW1) or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
A first valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer or the like] started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. Until the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is configured to be effective,
At least during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. When the special power combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the first passage area (hereinafter, “first notification [for example, FIG. 49 (f), FIG. 52 ( c3), FIGS. 53 (i), 55 (e), 55 (h), 56 (f), 56 (g), 58 (e), 59, 61 (h), 63 ( e), an over-winning effect shown in FIG. 56 (k), a winning effect shown in FIGS. 39, 40, 63 (c) and 63 (d), etc.]). And
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, “second notification”). [For example, as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 55, by displaying the total winning number display or the acquired winning ball number display, the winning in the variable winning openings 234 and 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present. 53 (f) to 53 (j) to display the total number of winning prize balls, thereby starting the first big hit game. From the present to the present, the number of prize balls acquired by winning the variable winning openings 234a and 235a is displayed in a manner that can be specified]]).
The first notification may be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and FIG. 55 (e), the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 (234a) in the first round is the second round. Is started after the start of the game, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or, as shown in FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the 14th round The ball wins in the inter-round interval after the end of the first round, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or the second variable winning opening in the fifteenth round as shown in FIG. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball 35a wins during the execution of the jackpot / big hit end effect, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 63, the first variable winning opening in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the ball 234a wins after the second round starts, and a winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
When the game ball passes through the first passage area, a prize ball may be paid out. [For example, when the first count switch SW1 is in the valid state, the first count switch SW1 is set to the game ball. Prize balls will be paid out when passes, etc.],
When the game ball passes through the second pass area, a prize ball may be paid out. [For example, when the second count switch SW2 is in an effective state, the game ball is set to the second ball. Prize balls will be paid out when passes, etc.],
The number of prize balls (for example, 14 or the like) paid out when a game ball passes through the second passage area is the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through the first passage area [ For example, 15)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notification means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic in the notification means can be realized.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed during a period in which the first valid period and the open state of the second attacker are overlapped. In some cases, the player can easily recognize that the ball has been effective.

  Also, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first attacker and the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second attacker are different, it is possible to have a variety of game characteristics and improve interest. May be able to.

  In addition, when the second attacker is in the open state, a prize to the first attacker may be notified, so that it is possible to give the player a sense of value and improve the interest. There is.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification and the second notification, or may be capable of executing notification other than the first notification and the second notification. . Further, the notification means may always execute the first notification and the second notification, or may not execute at least one of the first notification and the second notification.

  Further, the first attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the first attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the second attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the second attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the first passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the first attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the first attacker may pass. It may be something. Further, the first passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the first attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the first attacker. .

  Further, the second passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may pass. It may be something. Also, the second passage area may be one in which game balls that have entered the second attacker must pass, or may be that game balls that have entered the second attacker do not pass. .

  Also, only until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the first valid period elapses, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is made valid. It may be configured, and other than until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area may be performed. It may be configured to be valid. Also, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is always valid until the first valid period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. And the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is not valid until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  Also, only during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be valid, or during the period when the second attacker is in the open state. In other periods, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area may be configured to be valid. Further, during the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be always valid, or the period in which the second attacker is in the open state In, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may not be valid.

  In addition, the first notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the first passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be used. In addition, the first notification may always notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be.

  In addition, the second notification may be changed only in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area. It may be changeable in accordance with the number of game balls passing through the area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area. In addition, the second notification may be necessarily changed according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area, or the first passage area It may not be changed according to the number of at least one of the game balls that have passed through and the game balls that have passed through the second passage area.

  Further, the first notification can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. It is also possible that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker is closed. Good. In addition, the first notification may be started when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if it passes through the first passage area until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed.

  In addition, it may be configured such that when a game ball passes through the first passage area, a prize ball is always paid out, or when a game ball passes through the first passage area, a prize ball may not be paid out. Good.

  Further, a prize ball may be paid out whenever a game ball passes through the second pass area, or even if a prize ball may not be paid out when a game ball passes through the second pass area. Good.

  In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when game balls pass through the second passage area is greater than the number of prize balls paid out when game balls pass through the first passage area. Alternatively, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through the second passage area is greater than the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through the first passage area. It may be less.

  It should be noted that the first notification is a concept that includes an over-prize notification and a prize notification, such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of the attacker detects the over-prize notification. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the first notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  In addition, the second notification may be a winning number display indicating a winning number of each of the first attacker and the second attacker, or a winning number of the first attacker and a winning of the second attacker. It may be a single winning number display in which the numbers are summarized. Further, an acquired prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the respective prizes of the first attacker and the second attacker may be displayed, or a prize paid out in accordance with the prize in the first attacker. One acquired prize ball number display that summarizes the number of spheres and the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the prize in the second attacker may be used.

  Also, the over-prize notification of the first attacker may be performed even when the second attacker is open, but the notification of the first attacker may not be performed when the second attacker is open. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification performed by winning the first attacker and the notification performed by winning the second attacker may be the same or different.

  The probability change state is a state in which the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the non-probability change state.

In addition, “winning means [for example, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, a general winning port 226, etc.] in which a game ball can enter”,
A fourth passage area [for example, a game ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, or the general winning port 226] in which a game ball that has entered the winning means can pass. Area where the sensor 320 is provided],
With
The winning means is a means different from the first attacker,
The winning means is a means different from the second attacker,
When the game ball passes through the fourth passage area, a prize ball may be paid out [for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, and the general winning port 226]. A region where the sensor 320 for detecting the entered game ball is provided],
The number of prize balls paid out by the game balls passing through the fourth passage area is smaller than the number of prize balls paid out by the game balls passing through the first passage area,
The number of prize balls paid out by the game balls passing through the fourth passage area is smaller than the number of prize balls paid out by the game balls passing through the second passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of prize balls paid out when the first attacker and the second attacker win more than the prize means, so that the player can win the first attacker and the second attacker. In some cases, the desire to do so can be improved.

  Here, the prize winning means may be such that only game balls can enter, or something other than game balls may enter. The winning means may be such that the game ball always enters, or the game ball may not always enter.

  In addition, the fourth passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the prize means can pass through, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the prize means may pass therethrough. Is also good. In the fourth passage area, the game ball that has entered the prize means may pass through, or the game ball that has entered the prize means may not pass.

  Further, a configuration may be such that a prize ball is always paid out when a game ball passes through the fourth passage area, or a prize ball may not be paid out even when a game ball passes through the fourth passage area. You may.

  The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the fourth passage area may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball passes through the first passage area. Then, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through the fourth passage area may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through the second passage area. .

  Also, the number of prize balls paid out by passing game balls through the second passage area is larger than the number of prize balls paid out by passage of game balls through the fourth passage area, A configuration in which the number of prize balls paid out when game balls pass through the first passage area is larger than the number of prize balls paid out when game balls pass through the second passage area May be done.

Also, "the second notification is a notification that does not change when a game ball passes through the fourth passage area [for example, the total acquisition shown in FIG. 53 (f) to FIG. 53 (j) and the like. The display of the number of prize balls and the display of the number of acquired prize balls shown in FIG. 55 (b) to FIG. 55 (h) are the prize ports (first special figure) other than the first variable prize port 234a and the second variable prize port 235a. The starting port 230, the second special map starting port 232, and the general winning port 226) do not change depending on the prize],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since it is possible to grasp only the number of prize balls obtained by winning the first attacker and the second attacker, the player has won the first attacker and the second attacker Sometimes it is easy to keep track of the number.

  Here, the second notification may not be changed only by a game ball passing through the fourth passage area, or may be a case other than that a game ball passes through the fourth passage area. It may not change. Further, the second notification may not necessarily be changed by a game ball passing through the fourth passage area, or may be changed by a game ball passing through the fourth passage area. You may.

  When one of the plurality of winning means (for example, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232) is won, the second notification is changed and the other winning means is changed. When a prize is won (for example, a general prize port 226), the second notification may not be changed. When one of the plurality of winning means (for example, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232) is won, the second notification is not changed and the other is not changed. When a winning means (for example, a general winning opening 226) is won, the second notification may be changed.

In addition, “the payout control means [for example, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the like] capable of executing the control to pay out the prize ball,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a first number (for example, 15 pieces) of winning balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The payout control means is a means for executing control to pay out a second number (for example, 14 or the like) of winning balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is a period during which the passing of the game ball to the first passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW1 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the first passage area,
The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is a period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW2 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the second passage area,
The first number is a number different from the second number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the payout control means may be capable of executing only control for paying out prize balls, or may be capable of executing control other than control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control means may always execute control for paying out prize balls, or may not execute control for paying out prize balls.

  Further, the payout control means may execute control for paying out a first number of prize balls only when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the first number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a first number of prize balls when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. The control for paying out the first number of prize balls may not be executed.

  The payout control means may execute control for paying out a second number of winning balls only when the second payout condition is satisfied, or when the second payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the second number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a second number of prize balls when the second payout condition is satisfied, or when the second payout condition is satisfied. The control for paying out the second number of prize balls may not be executed.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is that only the requirement that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid is a requirement. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. However, the period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is that the requirement that the game ball has passed through the second pass area only during the period in which the pass of the game ball to the second pass area is valid. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during the period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. However, the period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the second passage area.

  Note that the first number and the second number may be the same number.

In addition, “the payout control means [for example, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the like] capable of executing the control to pay out the prize ball,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a first number (for example, 15 pieces) of winning balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The payout control means is a means for executing control to pay out a second number (for example, 14 or the like) of winning balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a third number (for example, three or more) of winning balls when a third payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is a period during which the passing of the game ball to the first passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW1 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the first passage area,
The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is a period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW2 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the second passage area,
The requirement for satisfying the third payout condition includes a requirement that a game ball has passed through the fourth passage area [for example, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general winning opening 226]. Pass through the area provided with the sensor 320 that detects the game ball that has entered the ball, etc.]
The first number is a number different from the second number,
The third number is a number smaller than the first number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the payout control means may be capable of executing only control for paying out prize balls, or may be capable of executing control other than control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control means may always execute control for paying out prize balls, or may not execute control for paying out prize balls.

  Further, the payout control means may execute control for paying out a first number of prize balls only when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the first number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a first number of prize balls when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. The control for paying out the first number of prize balls may not be executed.

  The payout control means may execute control for paying out a second number of winning balls only when the second payout condition is satisfied, or when the second payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the second number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a second number of prize balls when the second payout condition is satisfied, or when the second payout condition is satisfied. The control for paying out the second number of prize balls may not be executed.

  Further, the payout control means may execute control for paying out a third number of prize balls only when the third payout condition is satisfied, or when the third payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out a third number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a third number of prize balls when the third payout condition is satisfied, or when the third payout condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the control for paying out the third number of prize balls may not be executed.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is that only the requirement that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid is a requirement. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. However, the period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is that the requirement that the game ball has passed through the second pass area only during the period in which the pass of the game ball to the second pass area is valid. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during the period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. However, the period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the second passage area.

  In addition, the requirement for fulfilling the third payout condition may be a condition only that the game ball has passed the fourth passage area, or may be other than that the game ball has passed the fourth passage area. May be included. The requirement to satisfy the third payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the fourth passage area, or may not include that the game ball has passed through the fourth passage area. There may be.

  Note that the first number and the second number may be the same number, the third number may be the same as the first number, or the third number may be the second number. It may be the same as the number.

  Also, the second number may be greater than the third number and the first number may be greater than the second number.

In addition, "the first attacker is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is also valid during the period in which the first attacker is in the open state [see, for example, FIG. 29 and FIG. Thus, when the special power combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first attacker is in the open state, it may be possible to surely detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Is in the non-operating state during the operation of.
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Indicates that the special electrician 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “a second validity period that is started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by a special power 2 winning detection timer)] Until elapse, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, a “fourth notification [for example, FIG. 32 (k), FIG. 52 ( c3), a winning effect (over-winning effect) shown in FIG. 55 (h) and FIG. 59 (b)]]).
The fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second validity period elapses after the second attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k) and FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 (235a) is performing the inter-round interval, After the next round is started, a prize is won, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fourth notification may be performed during a period in which the second valid period and the open state of the first attacker overlap, so that the game balls that have passed through the second passage area are In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been effective.

  Here, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid only until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the second valid period elapses. Or the passage of the game ball to the second passage area other than until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. May be configured to be valid. In addition, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is always valid until the second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state elapses. And the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is not valid until a second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  In addition, the fourth notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be used. In addition, the fourth notification may always notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be.

  Further, the fourth notification can be started only when the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. It may be that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed and the second attacker is closed. Good. Further, the fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the fourth notification is a concept that includes notification of an over-winning prize and a prize notification such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of an attacker detects the winning. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the fourth notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  Further, the fourth notification may be the same notification mode as the first notification. In this case, for example, the same processing is performed for the first notification and the fourth notification, or the processing for notifying the prize to the first attacker and the prize to the second attacker is performed separately. However, the same data may be used. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that either the first attacker has won or the second attacker has won.

In addition, the “fourth notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball entering the second attacker passing through the second passage area [for example, FIG. 63 ( c) and winning sounds shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the second attacker.

Also, "the fourth notification is a second over-prize notification [for example, FIG. 52 (c3), FIG. 53 (i), FIG. 55 (e), FIG. 55 (h), FIG. (K), over sound shown in FIG. 59 and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the second attacker has won over.

In addition, "the notifying means includes a plurality of notifying means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc. ] Means constituted by
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a first notification means [for example, speaker 120 or the like],
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The first notification is notification performed by the first notification unit,
The second notification is notification performed by the second notification unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification and the second notification are performed by different notification means, so that the first notification and the second notification can be easily distinguished from each other, and the player can concentrate on the game. May be possible.

  Here, the plurality of notifying units may be configured by only the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit, or may further include notifying units other than the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit. May be. Further, the plurality of notifying means may necessarily include the first notifying means and the second notifying means, and may include at least one of the first notifying means and the second notifying means. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification may be performed only by the first notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the first notification means. The first notification may be always performed by the first notification unit, or may not be performed by the first notification unit.

  Further, the second notification may be performed only by the second notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the second notification means. Also, the second notification may be always performed by the second notification unit, or may not be performed by the second notification unit.

  Here, the first notification means is one or a plurality of notification means of sound output means, light emitting means, effect-moving means (such as an accessory), display means, and the like, and the second notification means Is one or a plurality of notifying means of a display means, a light emitting means, an effect movable means (such as an accessory), a sound output means and the like. Further, the first notification means and the second notification means may be the same type of means, for example, the relationship between the main display means and the sub display means, the light emitting means for the game frame and the game board. Relationship between the light emitting means, relationship between the light emitting means provided on the first accessory and the light emitting means provided around the center accessory, relationship between the speaker outputting the high frequency range and the speaker outputting the low frequency range, etc. Can be considered.

  The first notification may be, for example, notification performed by one notification unit, such as an over-prize notification by a sound output unit, or may be performed by an over-winning sound by a sound output unit and an over-winning display by a display unit. It may be a notification performed by a plurality of notification means, such as an over-prize effect.

  It goes without saying that the above is similarly applicable to the second notification.

  Further, the second notification may be performed by the first notification unit, but the second notification may not be performed.

  In addition, the first notification may be performed by the second notification unit, but the first notification may not be performed.

In addition, “the first notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball entering the first attacker passing through the first passage area [for example, FIG. 63 ( c) and the winning sounds shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has won.

Also, "the first notification is a first over-prize notification [for example, FIG. 52 (c3), FIG. 53 (i), FIG. 55 (e), FIG. 55 (h), FIG. (K), over sound shown in FIG. 59 and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has over-winned.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Information means capable of executing a plurality of types of information [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc.] When,
A first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234, 234a (second variable winning opening 235, 235a) or the like] that can be changed between an open state and a closed state;
A second attacker [for example, a second variable winning opening 235, 235a (first variable winning opening 234, 234a) or the like] that can be changed between the open state and the closed state;
A first passage area [for example, a first count switch SW1 (second count switch SW2) or the like] through which a game ball entering the first attacker can pass;
A second passage area [for example, a second count switch SW2 (first count switch SW1) or the like] through which a game ball entering the second attacker can pass;
A fifth passage area through which game balls can pass [eg, an out-counting sensor SW5 shown in FIG. 60, etc.]
A gaming table with
A first valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special power combination 1 winning detection timer or the like] started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. Until the passing of the game ball to the first passing area is configured to be effective,
At least during a period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective [for example, as shown in FIG. 2 operates, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state, and when the special electric utility 1 operates, the first count switch SW1 is changed to a valid state.
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the first passage area (hereinafter, “first notification [for example, FIG. 49 (f), FIG. 52 ( c3), FIGS. 53 (i), 55 (e), 55 (h), 56 (f), 56 (g), 58 (e), 59, 61 (h), 63 ( e), an over-winning effect shown in FIG. 56 (k), a winning effect shown in FIGS. 39, 40, 63 (c) and 63 (d), etc.]). And
One of the plurality of types of notification is the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area, the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area, and the number of game balls that have passed through the fifth passage area. (Hereinafter referred to as “fifth notification [for example, the display of the number of actual winning prize balls shown in FIG. 61 (c) to FIG. 62 (i), FIG. 62 (c) and FIG. Display of the actual total winning prize ball count]]).
The fifth passage area is a passage area provided at a position different from the first attacker,
The fifth passage area is a passage area provided at a position different from the second attacker,
The first notification may be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and FIG. 55 (e), the eleventh game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 (234a) in the first round is the second round. Is started after the start of the game, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or, as shown in FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game that has entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the 14th round. The ball wins in the inter-round interval after the end of the first round, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or the second variable winning opening in the fifteenth round as shown in FIG. The eleventh game ball that entered the ball 35a wins during the execution of the jackpot / big hit end effect, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, or as shown in FIG. 63, the first variable winning opening in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has entered the ball 234a wins after the second round starts, and a winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notification means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic in the notification means can be realized.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed during a period in which the first valid period and the open state of the second attacker are overlapped. In some cases, the player can easily recognize that the ball has been effective.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the first notification may be performed in a state where the fifth notification is being performed, and thus the player may be able to easily notice the first notification.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the player can confirm the number of game balls actually acquired, and thus may be able to grasp the performance of the gaming table.

  Here, the notification means may be capable of executing only the first notification and the fifth notification, or may be capable of executing the notification other than the first notification and the fifth notification. . In addition, the notification means may always execute the first notification and the fifth notification, or may not execute at least one of the first notification and the fifth notification. .

  Further, the first attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the first attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the second attacker may be changeable only between the open state and the closed state, or may be changeable other than the open state and the closed state. Further, the second attacker may always change between the open state and the closed state, or may not change between the open state and the closed state.

  Further, the first passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the first attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the first attacker may pass. It may be something. Further, the first passage area may be a game ball that has always entered the first attacker, or may not be a game ball that has entered the first attacker. .

  Further, the second passage area may be such that only game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass, or game balls other than game balls that have entered the second attacker may pass. It may be something. Also, the second passage area may be one in which game balls that have entered the second attacker must pass, or may be that game balls that have entered the second attacker do not pass. .

  In addition, the fifth passage area may be one through which only game balls can pass, or one other than game balls. Further, the fifth passage area may be a region where a game ball always passes or a case where a game ball does not pass.

  Also, only until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the first valid period elapses, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is made valid. It may be configured, and other than until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area may be performed. It may be configured to be valid. Also, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is always valid until the first valid period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. And the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is not valid until the first validity period started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  Also, only during the period when the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be valid, or during the period when the second attacker is in the open state. In other periods, the passing of the game ball to the second passing area may be configured to be valid. Further, during the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may be configured to be always valid, or the period in which the second attacker is in the open state In, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area may not be valid.

  In addition, the first notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the first passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be used. In addition, the first notification may always notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed the first passage area. May be.

  In addition, the fifth notification can be changed only according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area, game balls passing through the second passage area, and game balls passing through the fifth passage area. It may be, depending on the case other than according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area, game balls passing through the second passage area, and game balls passing through the fifth passage area May also be changeable. In addition, the fifth notification always changes according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area, game balls passing through the second passage area, and game balls passing through the fifth passage area. It may be, according to the number of at least one of a game ball passed through the first passage area, a game ball passed through the second passage area, and a game ball passed through the fifth passage area It may not change.

  Further, the first notification can be started only when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. It is also possible that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker is closed. Good. In addition, the first notification may be started when the game ball passes through the first passage area before the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if it passes through the first passage area until the first valid period elapses after the first attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the first notification is a concept that includes an over-prize notification and a prize notification, such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of the attacker detects the over-prize notification. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the first notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  Further, the fifth notification may be configured to be able to be notified only during the big hit game, or may be configured to be able to be notified even in the electric support state (probable change state or time saving state).

  Also, the over-prize notification of the first attacker may be performed even when the second attacker is open, but the notification of the first attacker may not be performed when the second attacker is open. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification performed by winning the first attacker and the notification performed by winning the second attacker may be the same or different.

  The probability change state is a state in which the big hit symbol is more easily displayed than the non-probability change state.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, referred to as“ the notification ”). "Second notification [For example, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 55, by displaying the total winning number display or the acquired winning ball number display, the variable winning opening 234, 235 from the start of the big hit game to the present. 53 (f) to 53 (j), by displaying the number of prize balls acquired by winning the prize, or by displaying the total acquired prize ball number display as shown in FIGS. 53 (f) to (j). The number of prize balls acquired by winning the variable winning openings 234a and 235a from the start of the game to the present is displayed in a identifiable manner]]).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to easily confirm the number of gaming balls obtained by entering the attacker.

  Here, the second notification may be one that can be changed only in accordance with the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area. It may be variable depending on the number of game balls that have passed through the passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area. In addition, the second notification may be necessarily changed according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area and the number of game balls passing through the second passage area, or the first passage area It may not be changed according to the number of at least one of the game balls that have passed through and the game balls that have passed through the second passage area.

In addition, a “operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like] operable by a player is provided,
When the operation of the operation unit is performed while the second notification is being notified, the second notification is finished and the fifth notification is started [for example, As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated while the acquired prize ball number display is displayed, the actual acquired prize ball number display is displayed, etc.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fifth notification and the second notification can be switched by operation of the operation means, so that the player can arbitrarily select the notification he wants to check, In some cases.

  Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, the operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, only when the operation of the operating means is performed while the second notification is being notified, the second notification may be ended and the fifth notification may be started, or the fifth notification may be started. The second notification may be ended and the fifth notification may be started even when the operation of the operation unit is not performed when the second notification is being notified. Further, when the operation of the operating means is performed while the second notification is being notified, the second notification may be ended and the fifth notification may be started without fail, or the fifth notification may be configured. When the operation unit is operated while the second notification is being notified, the second notification may end and the fifth notification may not start.

  Note that a period in which the fifth notification is performed may be configured so that the second notification is not performed. In addition, during the period in which the second notification is being performed, the fifth notification may not be performed.

  Further, the fifth notification may be notified first at the start of the big hit game, and may be configured to be switchable to the second notification by operating the operation means. May be notified, and the operation may be switched to the fifth notification by operating the operation means.

  Further, the fifth notification and the second notification may be selected and determined by the operation means at the start of the big hit game. Here, the determined notification may be configured to be switchable by operating the operation means again. Further, it may be configured such that once the notification is selected, it cannot be selected during execution of the big hit game. In this case, it can be changed at the next switchable opportunity (for example, at the start of the next big hit game, after the big hit game ends (probable change state or time saving state), when the symbol is stopped, at the start of the next first big hit, etc.). May be configured.

Further, in the big hit game, the period in which the fifth notification is reported is configured to overlap the period in which the second notification is reported [for example, as shown in FIG. , The display of the number of acquired prize balls and the display of the number of actual acquired prize balls are simultaneously displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fifth notification and the second notification may be confirmed at the same time.

  Here, in the big hit game, the period in which the fifth notification is reported may be configured to coincide with the period in which the second notification is reported, or the fifth notification is reported. A part of the period and a part of the period in which the second notification is notified may be configured to overlap. Further, the period in which the fifth notification is broadcast may be configured to be included in the period in which the second notification is broadcast, or the period in which the second notification is broadcast may be configured as the fifth notification. May be included in a period in which is notified.

Also, it is configured such that even if a game ball passes through the fifth passage area, a prize ball is not paid out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to suppress the improvement of the shooting ability.

In addition, “the payout control means [for example, the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 and the like] capable of executing the control to pay out the prize ball,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a first number (for example, 15 pieces) of winning balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a second number (for example, 14 or 15) of winning balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is a period during which the passing of the game ball to the first passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW1 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the first passage area,
The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is a period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid [for example, a period during which the count switch SW2 shown in FIGS. 29 and 47 is valid. Etc.), the requirement including that the game ball has passed through the second passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the payout control means may be capable of executing only control for paying out prize balls, or may be capable of executing control other than control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control means may always execute control for paying out prize balls, or may not execute control for paying out prize balls.

  Further, the payout control means may execute control for paying out a first number of prize balls only when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the first number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute control for always paying out a first number of prize balls when the first payout condition is satisfied, or when the first payout condition is satisfied. The control for paying out the first number of prize balls may not be executed.

  The payout control means may execute control for paying out a second number of winning balls only when the second payout condition is satisfied, or when the second payout condition is satisfied. In other cases, control for paying out the second number of prize balls may be executed. Further, the payout control means may execute a control for always paying out a second number of prize balls when the second payout condition is satisfied, or the payout control means may satisfy the second payout condition. In such a case, the control for paying out the second number of prize balls may not be executed.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the first payout condition is that only the requirement that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid is a requirement. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the first payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the first passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid. However, the period in which the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the first passage area.

  In addition, the requirement for satisfying the second payout condition is that the requirement that the game ball has passed through the second pass area only during the period in which the pass of the game ball to the second pass area is valid. It may include a requirement other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during a period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. The requirement for satisfying the second payout condition may necessarily include that the game ball has passed through the second passage area during the period in which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid. However, the period during which the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid may not include the case where the game ball has passed the second passage area.

  Note that the first number and the second number may be different or the same. Also, the first number may be greater than the second number, or the second number may be greater than the first number.

In addition, "the first attacker is configured such that the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is also valid during the period in which the first attacker is in the open state [see, for example, FIG. 29 and FIG. Thus, when the special power combination 1 is operated, the first count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, and when the special electric combination 2 is operated, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, when the first attacker is in the open state, it may be possible to surely detect the passage of the game ball by the first passage detection means.

In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the first attacker is in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Is in the non-operating state during the operation of.
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state while the second attacker is in the open state. [For example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Indicates that the special electrician 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “a second validity period that is started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by a special power 2 winning detection timer)] Until elapse, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that notifies that a game ball has passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, a “fourth notification [for example, FIG. 32 (k), FIG. 52 ( c3), a winning effect (over-winning effect) shown in FIG. 55 (h) and FIG. 59 (b)]]).
The fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second validity period elapses after the second attacker enters the closed state. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (k) and FIG. 52 (c3), the eleventh game ball that has entered the second variable winning opening 235 (235a) is performing the inter-round interval, After the next round is started, a prize is won, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the fourth notification may be performed during a period in which the second valid period and the open state of the first attacker overlap, so that the game balls that have passed through the second passage area are In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game has been effective.

  Here, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is valid only until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the second valid period elapses. Or the passage of the game ball to the second passage area other than until the second valid period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. May be configured to be valid. In addition, the configuration is such that the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is always valid until the second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state elapses. And the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is not valid until a second validity period started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state has elapsed. There may be.

  In addition, the fourth notification may be a notification that only the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may be a notification other than that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be used. In addition, the fourth notification may always notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area, or may not notify that the game ball has passed through the second passage area. May be.

  Further, the fourth notification can be started only when the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. It may be that the game ball can be started in addition to the case where the game ball has passed through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed and the second attacker is closed. Good. Further, the fourth notification may be started when the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed. However, the game ball may not start even if the game ball passes through the second passage area before the second valid period elapses after the second attacker is closed.

  It should be noted that the fourth notification is a concept that includes notification of an over-winning prize and a prize notification such as outputting a sound each time a prize sensor of an attacker detects the winning. That is, the present invention is not limited to the over-prize notification, and includes a notification that performs a notification according to the passage of the game ball to the prize sensor even when the attacker is in the closed state. Here, the fourth notification may be one of over-prize notification and prize notification.

  Further, the fourth notification may be the same notification mode as the first notification. In this case, for example, the same processing is performed for the first notification and the fourth notification, or the processing for notifying the prize to the first attacker and the prize to the second attacker is performed separately. However, the same data may be used. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that either the first attacker has won or the second attacker has won.

In addition, "the notifying means includes a plurality of notifying means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, etc. ] Means constituted by
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a first notification means [for example, speaker 120 or the like],
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The first notification is notification performed by the first notification unit,
The fifth notification is notification performed by the second notification unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notification and the fifth notification are performed by different notification means, so that the first notification and the fifth notification can be easily distinguished from each other, and the player can concentrate on the game. May be possible.

  Here, the plurality of notifying units may be configured by only the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit, or may further include notifying units other than the first notifying unit and the second notifying unit. May be. Further, the plurality of notifying means may necessarily include the first notifying means and the second notifying means, and may include at least one of the first notifying means and the second notifying means. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification may be performed only by the first notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the first notification means. The first notification may be always performed by the first notification unit, or may not be performed by the first notification unit.

  Further, the fifth notification may be performed only by the second notification means, or may be performed by notification means other than the second notification means. The fifth notification may be always performed by the second notification unit, or may not be performed by the second notification unit.

  Here, the first notification means is one or a plurality of notification means of sound output means, light emitting means, effect-moving means (such as an accessory), display means, and the like, and the second notification means Is one or a plurality of notifying means of a display means, a light emitting means, an effect movable means (such as an accessory), a sound output means and the like. Further, the first notification means and the second notification means may be the same type of means, for example, the relationship between the main display means and the sub display means, the light emitting means for the game frame and the game board. Relationship between the light emitting means, relationship between the light emitting means provided on the first accessory and the light emitting means provided around the center accessory, relationship between the speaker outputting the high frequency range and the speaker outputting the low frequency range, etc. Can be considered.

  The first notification may be, for example, notification performed by one notification unit, such as an over-prize notification by a sound output unit, or may be performed by an over-winning sound by a sound output unit and an over-winning display by a display unit. It may be a notification performed by a plurality of notification means, such as an over-prize effect.

  It goes without saying that the above is similarly applicable to the fifth notification.

  Further, the fifth notification may be performed by the first notification unit, but the fifth notification may not be performed.

  In addition, the first notification may be performed by the second notification unit, but the first notification may not be performed.

In addition, “the first notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball entering the first attacker passing through the first passage area [for example, FIG. 63 ( c) and the winning sounds shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the first attacker.

In addition, "the first notification is an over-prize notification [for example, FIG. 52 (c3), FIG. 53 (i), FIG. 55 (e), FIG. 55 (h), FIG. 56 (k). , Over sound shown in FIG. 59 and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recognize that the first attacker has over-winned.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,
"Sound output means [for example, speaker 120 etc.]
Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.],
Directing means,
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234 (234a), a second variable winning opening 235 (235a), etc.) that can be changed between an open state and a closed state;
A passage area [for example, a first count switch SW1, a second count switch SW2, and the like] through which a game ball entering the attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
Until a valid period [for example, a time (for example, 3 seconds) set by the special electric winning combination 1 winning detection timer or the like] that is started after the change of the attacker from the open state to the closed state elapses, the pass area is not changed. The passing of the game ball is valid,
When the Nth (for example, the tenth, etc.) game ball passes through the passing area after the attacker is in the open state, the attacker is closed,
When the (N + 1) -th (for example, eleventh) game ball passes through the passing area after the attacker changes from the open state to the closed state and before the validity period elapses, the sound output means causes an overrun. A winning sound [for example, a winning sound of "Keen" shown in FIG. 63 (e)] is output,
The image display means changes a display according to the total number of game balls that have passed through the passing area during execution of the big hit game (hereinafter, “total number display [for example, acquired prize balls shown in FIG. Number display etc.])).
The total number display is a display that changes even when the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area. [For example, as shown in FIG. Over winnings are added and displayed etc.],
The effect means is referred to as an effect that informs that the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is a probable change state (hereinafter, “probability change notification effect [for example, an effect of V notification shown in FIG. ),
During a period in which the probability variation notification effect by the representation section is being performed, the display total number Ri Do hidden [e.g., as shown in FIG. 54 (e), the V notification by emitting light guide plate 208e of the effect During execution, the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed and the display screen becomes darker, etc.],
When the power is cut off during the period in which the attacker is in the open state, and thereafter the power is restored (hereinafter, referred to as a “first case [for example, during a big hit round as shown in FIGS. 51 (d) to 51 (e)]). In the case where a power interruption occurs and the power is restored after that, etc.]), the total number display is displayed differently before the power interruption and after the power restoration [for example, FIG. 51 (c) to FIG. As shown in (f), when a power failure occurs during the big hit round and the power is restored thereafter, the winning total display that was displayed as “1215 pt” before the power failure becomes “0 pt”, etc.],
In the first case, when the sum of the number of game balls passing through the passage area before the power interruption and the number of game balls passing through the passage area after the power restoration becomes N + 1, the sound output means The over-winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c) to FIG. 51 (g), the over-winning sound is output even when an over-winning occurs during the power-off / recovery big hit round. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.
In addition, even after the attacker switches from the open state to the closed state, even if the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area before the expiration of the validity period, the total number display is displayed. In addition to the total number display, the display according to the passage of the (N + 1) th game ball to the passage area by the image display means is not performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 120, an over-winning sound is output, but the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform an over-winning effect.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, when a game ball passes through the passing area, a prize ball may be paid out,
The total number display is a display of the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls that have passed through the pass area. [For example, as shown in FIG. The display is such that the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 is added],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, a “start area [for example, first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232, etc.] is provided,
When the game ball passes through the starting area, symbol variation display may be started,
The total number display is a display that does not change when a game ball passes through to the starting area.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, “general winning opening [for example, general winning opening 226 etc.]
Prize detecting means for detecting a prize of a game ball to the general winning opening,
With
Even if the winning detection means detects the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, symbol variation display is not started,
The total number display is a display that changes even when a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening is detected.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "the effect means is means provided on a game board [for example, game board 200 or the like]
The effect means is a means configured to include a light guide plate [for example, a light guide plate 208e or the like] and a light emitting unit arranged on a side of the light guide plate,
The display displayed by the image display means can be visually recognized by the player via the light guide plate [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the display on the decorative design display device 208 can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 208e. Is possible, etc.],
A pattern [for example, a face T of the character of the protagonist's lord, shown in FIG. 54 (e)] is formed on the light guide plate,
When the light emitting means emits light, the pattern on the light guide plate is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), when the light source provided on the side surface of the light guide plate 208e emits light, the character of the protagonist character The face T emerges, etc.],
The probability variation notification effect is an effect performed by displaying the pattern on the light guide plate. [For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), when a game ball passes through the V pass switch SW3, the light guide plate 208e The light source provided emits light, and the effect of V notification in which the face T of the character of the hero's lord emerges is performed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, a display indicating that the number of game balls that have passed through the passing area during the execution of the big hit game is 0 is displayed as the total number display [for example, as shown in FIG. As described above, after the big hit game starts, if there is no winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening, “0” is displayed as the acquired prize ball number display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "the passage of the game ball to the passage area is effective during the period in which the attacker is in the open state. [ For example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 1 count switch SW1 is changed to an effective state, etc.],
During the execution of the big hit game, a display capable of specifying the combination of the big hit decorative symbols displayed at the time of the big hit (hereinafter, “big hit symbol display [for example, a decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 208 is displayed at the upper right corner of the display 208).
In the first case, the big hit symbol display that was displayed before the power interruption is not displayed after the power is restored. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (c) to 51 (f), during the big hit round If a power interruption occurs and the power is restored after that, the display of the big hit symbol that was displayed before the power interruption is hidden, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, “a second attacker (for example, a second variable winning opening 235, 235a, etc.) that can be changed between an open state and a closed state,
A second passage area [for example, a second count switch SW2 or the like] through which game balls entering the second attacker can pass;
With
The attacker is a first attacker [for example, a first variable winning opening 234, 234a, etc.]
The passing area is a first passing area [for example, the first count switch SW1 or the like],
When both the first attacker and the second attacker are in the closed state, the over-winning sound may be output by the sound output means [for example, FIG. 50 (a-1) to FIG. As shown in (a-2), the eleventh game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234, and thereafter, during the period of the remaining ball detection state or the period of the round-to-round inversion, the eleventh ball is played. When a game ball that has entered the first variable winning opening 234 passes through the first count switch SW1 and an over-winning occurs, an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is effective during a period in which the second attacker is at least in the open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Operates, the second count switch SW2 is changed to a valid state, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, “the second attacker is an attacker that is in a closed state while the first attacker is in an open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. During this time, Tokuden 2 is inactive.],
The first attacker is an attacker that is in a closed state while the second attacker is in an open state [for example, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. Role 1 is inactive.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, after the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker is changed from the closed state to the open state, the first passage area is not changed until the validity period elapses. When the game ball passes, the over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit [for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the sound enters the first variable winning opening 234 in the first round. The eleventh game ball that has been balled wins after the second round is started, and an over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Further, "the gaming table, the pachinko machine [e.g., a pachinko machine 100, etc.] der is,
In the first case, the total number display displayed after power recovery is a display indicating 0 [for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c) to FIG. After that, when the power supply is restored, the total number of winnings displayed as “1215 pt” before the power interruption becomes “0 pt”, etc.],
In the first case, the total number display displayed after the power is restored does not change even if a game ball passes through the passing area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In the following, additional descriptions including those described above are added.

(Appendix 1)
Sound output means,
A first variable winning means that can be changed to an easy ball entry state where the game ball is easy to enter and a difficult ball entry state where the game ball is difficult to enter,
Second variable winning means that can be changed to the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state,
A first passage area through which game balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass,
First passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed the first passage region,
A gaming table with
The first variable prize means, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, when the first maximum number of game balls has passed to the first passage area, the ball entry difficult state It is a variable winning means that changes to
The first passage detection means is configured to move to the first passage area until a first valid period elapses after the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state. It is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of the game ball as effective,
The sound output means is such that the first maximum winning number of game balls pass through the first passing area and the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, After the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state, if a game ball has passed to the first passing area before the first validity period has elapsed, the first Is a means that can output the over winning sound of
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1,
The first passage detection means can treat the passage of the game ball to the first passage area as effective even during the period when the first variable winning means is in the easy ball entry state. Passage detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein
The sound output means is such that the first maximum winning number of game balls pass into the first passage area and the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, After the second variable winning means has changed to the easy ball entry state, if the game ball has passed to the first passage area before the first validity period elapses, A means for outputting the first over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 3,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second variable winning means can pass,
Second passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second passage region,
With
The second variable prize means, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, when the game ball of the second maximum winning number passes to the second passing area, the ball entry difficult state It is a variable winning means that changes to
The second passage detecting means is a passage that can handle the passage of the game ball to the second passage area as being effective during the period when the second variable winning means is in the easy ball entry state. Detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 4,
The second pass detection means is configured to move to the second pass area until a second valid period elapses after the second variable winning means changes from the easy ball entry state to the difficult ball entry state. It is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of the game ball as effective,
The sound output means is such that the second maximum winning number of game balls pass through the second passing area, and the second variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, After the first variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state, if a game ball has passed to the second passage area before the second validity period elapses, the second Is a means that can output the over winning sound of
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 6)
In the gaming table described in Supplementary Note 4 or 5,
Equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effect display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first pass display”) that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the first pass area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second pass display”) that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the second pass area,
The display means is a means that can start displaying the first pass display when the first variable winning means enters the easy-to-enter state,
The display means is a means that can start displaying the second pass display when the second variable winning means enters the easy-to-enter state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 6, wherein
The display means is configured such that, after the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, when the second variable-winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state, A means for starting display of the second pass display in place of the first pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 6 or 7, wherein
The display means is configured such that, after the second variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, when the first variable-winning means enters the easy-to-enter state, A means for starting display of the first pass display in place of the second pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 6, wherein
The display means is configured such that, after the first variable winning means has changed from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, if the second variable-winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state, A means for starting to display the second pass display while displaying the first pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 6 or 9, wherein
The display means is configured such that, after the second variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, when the first variable-winning means enters the easy-to-enter state, A means for starting to display the first pass display while displaying the second pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 4 or 5, wherein
Game control means capable of executing a jackpot game,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays,
With
During the execution of the big hit game, the display means changes a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth game”) according to the total number of game balls passing through the first passage area and game balls passing through the second passage area "Three pass display").
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11,
The second variable prize means is a variable prize means in which the first variable prize means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy entry state,
The first variable prize means is a variable prize means in which the second variable prize means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy entry state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 12,
First control means;
Second control means capable of executing control of the sound output means,
With
The first control means can transmit first passage information to the second control means when the first passage detection means detects the passage of the game ball to the first passage area. Control means,
The second control means is a control means having a first storage area,
The second control means controls the number of times the first variable prize means receives the first pass information until the first validity period elapses after the first variable winning means enters the easy ball entry state (hereinafter, “ "The first number of passes").
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage times in the first storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means to the first output Control means capable of executing control to output an over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 13, wherein
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 15)
A production means that can execute a plurality of types of productions,
Game control means capable of executing a jackpot game,
A first variable winning means that can be changed to an easy ball entry state where the game ball is easy to enter and a difficult ball entry state where the game ball is difficult to enter,
Second variable winning means that can be changed to the easy ball entry state and the difficult ball entry state,
A first passage area through which game balls that have entered the first variable winning means can pass,
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first ballistic effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second ballistic effect,
The first ball entry effect is a ball entry effect that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area during the execution of the big hit game,
The second ball entry effect is a ball entry effect that can be started when a game ball enters the second variable winning means during execution of the big hit game,
The second ball entry effect is a ball entry effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means changes to the ball entry easy state. is there,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15, wherein
The first ball entry effect is a ball entry effect that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the first passage area,
The second ball entry effect is a ball entry effect that changes according to the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means,
A game ball characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15 or 16, wherein
After the first variable winning means has changed from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, if the second variable-winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state, A means for ending the first ballistic effect and starting the second ballistic effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 17, wherein
A first passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed the first passage region,
The first passage detection means is configured to move to the first passage area until a first valid period elapses after the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state. It is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of the game ball as effective,
The second winning effect is after the first variable winning means changes from the easy-to-enter state to the difficult-to-enter state, and then after the second variable-winning means changes to the easy-to-enter state. , When there is a passing of the game ball to the first passage area until the first validity period has elapsed, is a ball entry effect started in place of the first ball entry effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 18, wherein
The first passage detection means can treat the passage of the game ball to the first passage area as effective even during the period when the first variable winning means is in the easy ball entry state. Passage detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 18 or 19,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second variable winning means can pass,
Second passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second passage region,
With
The second passage detection means is configured to, during a period in which the second variable winning means is in the easy ball entry state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth effective period”), play a game ball to the second passage area. Is a passage detection means that can handle the passage of
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 20, wherein
In the second ballistic effect, during a period in which the first valid period and the fourth valid period overlap, when a game ball passes through the first passage area, the first ball entry It is a ball entry production that is executed in place of the production,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 21, wherein
One of the plurality of types of effects is a third ballistic effect,
The third winning effect is based on the total number of gaming balls entering the first variable winning means and the second number of playing balls entering the second variable winning means during execution of the big hit game. It is a changing entry direction,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 22, wherein
The effect means is a means including display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effect display,
The first ballistic effect is a first ballistic effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays,
The second entering effect is a second entering effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays,
The first ball entry effect display is a ball entry effect display that can be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area during execution of the big hit game,
The second ball entry effect display is a ball entry effect display that can be started when a game ball enters the second variable winning means during execution of the big hit game,
The second ball entry effect display is a ball entry effect that can be started even when a game ball passes through the first passage area after the second variable winning means changes to the ball entry easy state. Display
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 23,
The second variable prize means is a variable prize means in which the first variable prize means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy entry state,
The first variable prize means is a variable prize means in which the second variable prize means is in the ball entry difficult state during the period in which the ball is in the easy entry state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 24,
Sound output means,
When the second variable winning means changes to the easy-to-enter-ball state, counting means capable of starting counting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning means,
With
The second variable prize means is a variable prize means that changes to the difficult-to-enter state when a game ball having the second maximum prize number is entered after the easy-to-enter state. Yes,
After the second variable winning means changes to the easy ball entry state, even if a game ball passes through the first passage area, the counting means enters the second variable winning means. It is a means to count as played game balls,
The sound output unit is a unit that can output a third over-winning sound when the number of game balls counted by the counting unit exceeds the second maximum winning number,
A game ball characterized by that.

(Supplementary Note 26)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 25,
First control means;
Second control means capable of executing control of the sound output means,
With
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting first passage information to the second control means when a game ball passes through the first passage area,
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting second passage information to the second control means when a game ball enters the second variable winning means,
The second control means is a control means having a third storage area,
The counting means is means for counting the number of times the second control means has received the second passage information after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The counting means is means for counting the number of times the first pass information has been received, after the second variable winning means has changed to the easy-to-enter state,
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counting result of the counting means in the third storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the counting result of the counting means stored in the third storage area exceeds the second maximum winning number, the sound output means to the third output It is a means that can output over winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 27)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 15 to 26,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 28)
Sound output means,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
Game control means capable of executing a jackpot game,
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effect displays,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
The first attacker, after being in the open state, when there is a passage of the first maximum winning number of game balls to the first passage area, the attacker is in a closed state,
Until the first validity period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state, the passage of game balls to the first passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
The second attacker is an attacker that changes to the closed state when the second maximum winning number of game balls is passed to the second passage area after the open state. ,
In the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
After the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the first state until the first validity period elapses. By passing through the passage area, the first over-winning sound may be output by the sound output unit,
The display means is capable of displaying a display that changes according to the total number of game balls passing through the first passage area and game balls passing through the second passage area during execution of the big hit game. Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 28,
During the period in which the first attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is configured to be effective,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 30)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 28 or 29,
When the first maximum winning number of game balls pass through the first passage area, the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and then the second attacker changes to the open state. Even after the change, during the period of the first validity period, the game output ball passes through the first passage area, the first over-winning sound is output by the sound output means. Is configured to be
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 30,
The first over-winning sound has passed through the first passage area before the first valid period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state. It is an over-winning sound that can be output when the number of gaming balls exceeds the first maximum winning number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 31, wherein
Until the second validity period elapses after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
After the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the first attacker changes to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second state until the second validity period elapses. By passing through the passage area, the sound output means may output a second over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 32,
The second over-winning sound has passed through the second passage area before the second validity period has elapsed since the second attacker changed from the open state to the closed state. It is an over-winning sound that can be output when the number of gaming balls exceeds the second maximum winning number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 34)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 33,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first pass display”) that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the first pass area,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second pass display”) that changes according to the number of game balls passing through the second pass area,
The display unit is a unit that can start displaying the first pass display when the first attacker is in the open state,
The display unit is a unit that can start displaying the second pass display when the second attacker is in the open state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 35)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 34,
When the second attacker is in the open state after the first attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, the display means replaces the first pass display with the first pass display. Means to start the display of the second pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 36)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 34 or 35,
After the second attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, when the first attacker has changed to the open state, the display means replaces the second pass display with the second pass display. Means for starting the display of one pass display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 34,
The display means, after the first attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, when the second attacker is changed to the open state, the first pass display is displayed while the first attacker is displayed. Means for starting the display of the second passage display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 34 or 37,
The display means, after the second attacker is changed from the open state to the closed state, when the first attacker is changed to the open state, the second pass display is displayed while the second attacker is displayed. Means for starting the display of the first passage display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 38,
The second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during a period in which the first attacker is in the open state,
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during a period in which the second attacker is in the open state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 40)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 39,
First control means;
Second control means capable of executing control of the sound output means,
With
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting first pass information to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first pass area,
The second control means is a control means having a first storage area,
The second control means controls the number of times the first pass information is received (hereinafter, referred to as “first pass Control means) capable of counting the number of times.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage times in the first storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the sound output means to the first output Control means capable of executing control to output an over-winning sound,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 40,
A first passage detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed the first passage region,
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state when the first passage detection means detects the passage of the first maximum winning number of game balls after being in the open state. Yes,
A configuration in which the passage of a game ball by the first passage detection means can be detected until the first validity period elapses after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state. Has been
After the first attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, the second attacker has changed to the open state, the first passage detection means until the first validity period elapses. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the, there is a case where the first over-winning sound is output by the sound output means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 42)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 28 to 41,
When the second attacker is in the closed state during the first valid period, the game output ball passes through the first passage area, so that the sound output means causes the first over-winning. Sound may be output,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 43)
Notification means,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
A gaming table with
The first attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in a closed state when a game ball having a first maximum winning number passes through the first passage area,
Until the first validity period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state, the passage of game balls to the first passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
The second attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in the closed state when a game ball with a second maximum winning number passes to the second passage area,
In the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
The second attacker is an attacker provided with a third passage area different from the second passage area,
When the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third passage area, the probability change state may be started after the big hit is completed,
The notifying means, after the second attacker has changed to the open state, and before the end of the first validity period, that the game ball has passed the first passage area. This is a means that may provide a notification to be notified (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification”).
The notification means performs notification (hereinafter, referred to as “second notification”) that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and game balls that have passed through the second passage area. Is a means that may be
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 44)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 43,
The notification unit is a unit that may perform notification (hereinafter, referred to as “third notification”) to notify that the game ball has passed through the third passage area.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 45)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 43 or 44,
The second attacker is an attacker provided with movable means,
The second passage area is a passage area upstream of the movable means,
The third passage area is a passage area downstream of the movable unit,
The movable means is means capable of moving from a first position to a second position,
During the intervention of the second attacker, the movable means moves from the first position to the second position, so that a game ball passing through the second passage area can enter the third passage area. Is configured to
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 43 to 45,
The jackpot is a period at least composed of a plurality of rounds,
One of the plurality of rounds is a first round,
One of the plurality of rounds is a second certain degree,
The second attacker is an attacker that opens in the first round,
The second attacker is an attacker that opens in the second round,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 46,
Equipped with main control means,
The main control unit is a unit that can at least execute a jackpot control,
The main control means is means for starting the probable change state when the probable change start condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the probable change start condition is satisfied is a requirement that, during the execution of the jackpot control by the main control means, a game ball that has entered the second attacker has passed through the third passage area. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 48)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 47,
The requirement that the probable change start condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes the end of the jackpot control.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 48,
During the period in which the first attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is configured to be effective,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 49,
The second attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during a period in which the first attacker is in the open state,
The first attacker is an attacker that is in the closed state during a period in which the second attacker is in the open state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 51)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 50,
The notifying unit is a unit configured by a plurality of notifying units,
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a first notification means,
One notification means of the plurality of notification means is a second notification means,
The first notification means is different from the second notification means,
The first notification unit is a unit that may perform the first notification,
The second notification means is a means that may perform the second notification,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 52)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 51,
Until a second valid period, which is started after the second attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, elapse of a game ball to the second passage area is enabled. Is composed of
The notifying unit notifies that the game ball has passed through the first passage area after the first attacker changes to the open state and before the validity period of the valley ends. (Hereinafter referred to as "third notification").
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 53)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 52,
The first notification is an over-prize notification,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 54)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 52,
The first notification is a prize notification,
The prize notification is a notification that is notified in response to a game ball having entered the first attacker passing through the first passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 55)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 43 to 54,
First control means;
Second control means;
With
The first control means is a control means capable of transmitting first pass information to the second control means when a game ball has passed to the first pass area,
The second control means is a control means having a first storage area,
The second control means controls the number of times the first pass information is received (hereinafter, referred to as “first pass Control means) capable of counting the number of times.
The second control means is a control means capable of storing the counted first passage times in the first storage area,
The second control means, when the value indicating the first pass count stored in the first storage area exceeds the first maximum winning number, the first notification to the notification means Control means capable of executing control to be notified of
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the first control means may be referred to as “main control means” or may be referred to as “main control means”.

  In addition, the second control means may be referred to as “sub-control means”, may be referred to as “sub-control means”, or may be referred to as “effect control means”.

  Further, the “first storage area” may be a RAM.

(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 43 to 55,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 57)
Notification means,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
A gaming table with
The first attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in a closed state when a game ball having a first maximum winning number passes through the first passage area,
Until the first validity period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state, the passage of game balls to the first passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
The second attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in the closed state when a game ball with a second maximum winning number passes to the second passage area,
In the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
The notifying means, after the second attacker has changed to the open state, and before the end of the first validity period, that the game ball has passed the first passage area. This is a means that may provide a notification to be notified (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification”).
The notification unit performs notification (hereinafter, referred to as “second notification”) that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and game balls that have passed through the second passage area. Is a means that may be
The notification unit is a unit that may perform notification according to the number of extended holidays (hereinafter, referred to as “announcement of extended holidays”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 58)
The gaming table according to attachment 57,
The jackpot is at least composed of multiple rounds,
The notifying unit is a unit that performs the extended-villa notification in the plurality of rounds.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 59)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 57 or 58,
The notifying unit is a unit configured to perform the linked-house notification in a jackpot that is a first number of connected rooms,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 59,
The notifying unit is a unit configured to not perform the consecutive-village notification in a jackpot that becomes a second-number consecutive-villa,
The second number is a different number from the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 57 to 60,
The number of consecutive holidays does not include the number of small hits,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 62)
Notification means,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
A gaming table with
The first attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in a closed state when a game ball having a first maximum winning number passes through the first passage area,
Until the first validity period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state, the passage of game balls to the first passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
The second attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in the closed state when a game ball with a second maximum winning number passes to the second passage area,
In the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
The notifying means, after the second attacker has changed to the open state, and before the end of the first validity period, that the game ball has passed the first passage area. This is a means that may provide a notification to be notified (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification”).
The notification means performs notification (hereinafter, referred to as “second notification”) that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and game balls that have passed through the second passage area. Is a means that may be
The number of prize balls by passing through the second passage area is different from the number of prize balls by passing through the first passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 63)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 62,
With prize winning means,
The winning means is means provided with a fourth passage area,
The number of prize balls by passing through the fourth pass area is less than the number of prize balls by passing through the first pass area,
The number of prize balls by passing through the fourth passage area is smaller than the number of prize balls by passing through the second passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 64)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 63,
The second notification is a notification configured so as not to be changed by the number of game balls that have passed through the fourth passage area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 64,
With payout control means,
The payout control means is means for executing control for paying out a first number of prize balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first payout condition is satisfied is that a game ball entering the first attacker passes through the first pass area during a period in which the pass to the first pass area is valid. Requirements,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a second number of prize balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the second payout condition is satisfied is that, during a period in which the passage to the second passage area is valid, a game ball entering the second attacker passes through the second passage area. Requirements,
The first number is a number different from the second number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 66)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 63 or 64,
With payout control means,
The payout control means is means for executing control for paying out a first number of prize balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first payout condition is satisfied is that a game ball entering the first attacker passes through the first pass area during a period in which the pass to the first pass area is valid. Requirements,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a second number of prize balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the second payout condition is satisfied is that, during a period in which the passage to the second passage area is valid, a game ball entering the second attacker passes through the second passage area. Requirements,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a third number of prize balls when a third payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the third payout condition is satisfied is a requirement that includes that a game ball that has entered the prize means has passed through the fourth passage area,
The first number is a number different from the second number,
The third number is a number smaller than the first number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 67)
Game board,
Notification means,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
A gaming table with
The first attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in a closed state when a game ball having a first maximum winning number passes through the first passage area,
Until the first validity period has elapsed since the first attacker changed from the open state to the closed state, the passage of game balls to the first passage area is configured to be valid. Yes,
The second attacker in the open state is an attacker configured to be in the closed state when a game ball with a second maximum winning number passes to the second passage area,
In the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
The notifying means, after the second attacker has changed to the open state, and before the end of the first validity period, that the game ball has passed the first passage area. This is a means that may provide a notification to be notified (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification”).
The notification means performs notification (hereinafter, referred to as “second notification”) that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and game balls that have passed through the second passage area. Is a means that may be
The gaming board is means provided with at least a fifth passage area,
The fifth passage area is a passage area provided at a different position from the first attacker,
The fifth pass area is a pass area provided at a different position from the second attacker,
The notifying unit is a unit that may perform a notification (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth notification”) according to a game ball that has passed through the fifth pass area in a big hit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 68)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 67,
The fifth notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 67 or 68,
Equipped with operating means,
The fifth notification is configured to be switched to the second notification by the operation of the operation unit when the fifth notification is being performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 67 to 69,
In the big hit, the fifth notification is configured to be performed during a period in which the second notification is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 71)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 67 to 70,
Even if a game ball passes through the fifth pass area, the payout is not performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 67 to 71,
With payout control means,
The payout control means is means for executing control for paying out a first number of prize balls when a first payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the first payout condition is satisfied is that a game ball entering the first attacker passes through the first pass area during a period in which the pass to the first pass area is valid. Requirements,
The payout control means is a means for executing control for paying out a second number of prize balls when a second payout condition is satisfied,
The requirement that the second payout condition is satisfied is that, during a period in which the passage to the second passage area is valid, a game ball entering the second attacker passes through the second passage area. Requirements that include:
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 73)
Notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notification,
The first attacker,
With a second attacker,
A first passage area through which a game ball that has entered the first attacker can pass,
A second passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass,
A third passage area through which game balls that have entered the second attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
The first attacker is an attacker that can change from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state,
The second attacker is an attacker capable of changing from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state,
Until a first valid period that is started after the first attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area is enabled. Is composed of
In the period in which the second attacker is at least in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the second passage area is configured to be effective,
The third passage area is a passage area different from the second passage area,
During the execution of the jackpot game, when the game ball that has entered the second attacker passes through the third passage area, a probable change state can be started after the end of the jackpot game,
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification”) that notifies that the game ball has passed through the first passage area.
One of the plurality of types of notification is a notification that changes according to the number of game balls that have passed through the first passage area and the number of game balls that have passed through the second passage area (hereinafter, “second notification”). Notification).)
The first notification may be started when a game ball passes through the first passage area before the first validity period elapses after the first attacker enters the closed state. Information
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 73,
Equipped with movable means,
The movable means is a means capable of moving from any one of the first position and the second position to the other position,
The third pass area is a pass area through which a game ball that has passed through the second pass area can pass,
The first position is a position for preventing a game ball that has passed through the second passage area from passing through the third passage area,
The second position is a position that allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage area to pass through the third passage area,
During the period in which the second attacker is in the open state, the movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. However, for example, a game ball is sealed in a main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the sealed ball is circulated and used in the pachinko machine main body. The present invention can also be applied to an expression type pachinko machine, and this enclosed type pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launching ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is a component contained only in each of the embodiment, the modification, and the supplementary description described above, the component may be applied to the other embodiment, the modification, and the supplementary note.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 230 First special figure starting port 232 Second special figure starting port 234 First variable winning opening 235 Second Variable winning opening 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 second sub-control unit 600 payout control unit SW1 first count switch SW2 second count switch

Claims (9)

Sound output means,
Image display means;
Directing means,
An attacker that can change between an open state and a closed state,
A pass area through which a game ball entering the attacker can pass;
A gaming table with
Until the validity period started after the attacker changes from the open state to the closed state, the passage of the game ball to the passage area is valid,
When the Nth game ball passes through the passing area after the attacker has been opened, the attacker is closed,
After the attacker has changed from the open state to the closed state, if the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area before the expiration of the validity period, an over-winning sound is output by the sound output means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as “total number display”) that changes according to the total number of game balls that have passed through the passing area during execution of the big hit game,
The total number display is a display that changes even when the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area,
The effect means is means capable of executing an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “probable change notification effect”) for notifying that the game state after the end of the big hit game is in the certainty state,
During a period in which the probability variation notification effect by the representation section is being performed, the total number displayed Ri Do hidden,
When the power is cut off during the period in which the attacker is in the open state and the power is restored thereafter (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the total number display is different before and after the power is restored. Is displayed,
In the first case, when the sum of the number of game balls passing through the passage area before power interruption and the number of game balls passing through the passage area after power restoration is N + 1, the sound output means The over-winning sound is output by
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
Even if the (N + 1) th game ball passes through the passing area after the attacker changes from the open state to the closed state until the expiration of the validity period, the total number display is displayed, but the total number is displayed. Apart from the numerical display, the display according to the passage of the (N + 1) th game ball to the passage area by the image display means is not performed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
When a game ball passes through the passing area, a prize ball may be paid out,
The total number display is a display of the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls that have passed through the passing area.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
With a starting area,
When the game ball passes through the starting area, symbol variation display may be started,
The total number display is a display that does not change when a game ball passes through to the starting area.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein:
General winning opening,
Prize detecting means for detecting a prize of a game ball to the general winning opening,
With
Even if the winning detection means detects the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, symbol variation display is not started,
The total number display is a display that changes even when a winning of a game ball to the general winning opening is detected.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The effect means is means provided on a game board,
The effect means is a means configured to include a light guide plate and a light emitting unit arranged on a side of the light guide plate,
A player can visually recognize a display displayed by the image display means via the light guide plate,
A pattern is formed on the light guide plate,
The pattern on the light guide plate is displayed by the light emitting means emitting light,
The probability variation notification effect is an effect performed by displaying the pattern on the light guide plate.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
If no game balls have passed through the passing area during execution of the big hit game, a display indicating that the total number display is 0 is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
During the period in which the attacker is in the open state, the passage of the game ball to the passage area is valid ,
During the execution of the big hit game, a display (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit symbol display") for specifying a combination of the big hit decorative symbols displayed at the time of the big hit is displayed.
In the first case, the big hit symbol display that was displayed before the power interruption is not displayed after the power recovery,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
  The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
  In the first case, the total number display displayed after power restoration is a display indicating 0,
  In the first case, the total number display displayed after the power is restored does not change even if a game ball passes through the passing area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.